diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-21 02:21:33 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-21 02:21:33 -0800 |
| commit | 90cf76486e46bfe9521215d3b6f21d40f82a9b27 (patch) | |
| tree | 5a422adef494bddebddf3fd29f809baa862612b8 /old/68944-h/68944-h.htm | |
| parent | 540800595473eb8d80b9490933daf041bc40dca1 (diff) | |
Diffstat (limited to 'old/68944-h/68944-h.htm')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/68944-h/68944-h.htm | 10360 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 10360 deletions
diff --git a/old/68944-h/68944-h.htm b/old/68944-h/68944-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index aaca488..0000000 --- a/old/68944-h/68944-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10360 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> -<head> - <meta charset="UTF-8" /> - <title> - Lost on the Orinoco, by Edward Stratemeyer—A Project Gutenberg eBook - </title> - <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover" /> - <style> /* <![CDATA[ */ - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - - h1,h2 { - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -p { - margin-top: .51em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .49em; -} - -hr { - width: 33%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 33.5%; - margin-right: 33.5%; - clear: both; -} - -hr.tb {width: 45%; margin-left: 27.5%; margin-right: 27.5%;} -hr.tiny {width: 10%; margin-left: 45%; margin-right: 45%;} -hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} -@media print { hr.chap {display: none; visibility: hidden;} } - -div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} -h2.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} - -table { - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; -} - -.tdr {text-align: right;} - -.pagenum { - position: absolute; - left: 92%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; - font-style: normal; - font-weight: normal; - font-variant: normal; - text-indent: 0; -} - -.blockquot { - margin-left: 17.5%; - margin-right: 17.5%; -} - -.x-ebookmaker .blockquot { - margin-left: 7.5%; - margin-right: 7.5%; -} - -.center {text-align: center;} - -.right {text-align: right;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -.antiqua { - font-family: Blackletter, Fraktur, Textur, "Old English Text MT", "Olde English Mt", "Olde English", Gothic, serif, sans-serif;} - -.ph1 {text-align: center; font-size: large; font-weight: bold;} -.ph2 {text-align: center; font-size: xx-large; font-weight: bold;} -.ph3 {text-align: center; font-size: x-large; font-weight: bold;} - -div.titlepage {text-align: center; page-break-before: always; page-break-after: always;} -div.titlepage p {text-align: center; font-weight: bold; line-height: 1.5; margin-top: 2em;} - -.large {font-size: 125%;} - -.indent1 {margin-right: 12em;} -.indent2 {margin-right: 7em;} -.indent3 {margin-right: 5em;} -.indent4 {margin-left: 4em;} -.indent5 {margin-left: 8em;} - -.gap {padding-left: 3em;} - -.caption {font-weight: bold; text-align: center;} - -.x-ebookmaker .hide {display: none; visibility: hidden;} - -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; - page-break-inside: avoid; - max-width: 100%; -} - -.poetry-container {text-align: center;} -.poetry {display: inline-block; text-align: left;} - -@media print { .poetry {display: block;} } -.x-ebookmaker .poetry {display: block;} - -.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; - color: black; - font-size:smaller; - margin-left: 17.5%; - margin-right: 17.5%; - padding: 1em; - margin-bottom: 1em; - font-family:sans-serif, serif; } - - /* ]]> */ </style> -</head> -<body> -<p style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Lost on the Orinoco, by Edward Stratemeyer</p> -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online -at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you -are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this eBook. -</div> - -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Lost on the Orinoco</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:1em;'>American boys in Venezuela</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Edward Stratemeyer</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Illustrator: A. B. Shute</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: September 9, 2022 [eBook #68944]</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</p> - <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; text-align:left'>Produced by: David Edwards, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was produced from images made available by the HathiTrust Digital Library.)</p> -<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LOST ON THE ORINOCO ***</div> - -<div class="figcenter hide"><img src="images/coversmall.jpg" width="450" alt="" /></div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p class="ph3">EDWARD STRATEMEYER’S BOOKS</p> - -<p class="ph1"><span class="antiqua">Old Glory Series</span></p> - -<p class="center"><i>Six Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<p class="center"><span class="indent1">UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA.</span><br /> -<span class="indent2">A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA.</span><br /> -<span class="indent3">FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS.</span><br /> -UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES.<br /> -<span class="indent4">THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE.</span><br /> -<span class="indent5">UNDER <span class="smcap">MacARTHUR</span> IN LUZON.</span></p> - -<p class="ph1"><span class="antiqua">Bound to Succeed Series</span></p> - -<p class="center"><i>Three Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.00.</i></p> - -<p class="center"> -RICHARD DARE’S VENTURE. <span class="gap"> OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH.</span><br /> -TO ALASKA FOR GOLD.</p> - -<p class="ph1"><span class="antiqua">Ship and Shore Series</span></p> - -<p class="center"><i>Three Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.00.</i></p> - -<p class="center">THE LAST CRUISE OF THE SPITFIRE. <span class="gap"> TRUE TO HIMSELF.</span><br /> -REUBEN STONE’S DISCOVERY.</p> - -<p class="ph1"><span class="antiqua">War and Adventure Stories</span></p> - -<p class="center"><i>Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<p class="center">ON TO PEKIN. <span class="gap"> BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON.</span></p> - -<p class="ph1"><span class="antiqua">Colonial Series</span></p> - -<p class="center"><i>Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> - -<p>WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST; Or, A Soldier Boy’s Battles -in the Wilderness.<br /> -<br /> -MARCHING ON NIAGARA; Or, The Soldier Boy of the Old Frontier.</p> -</div></div> - -<p class="ph1"><span class="antiqua">American Boys’ Biographical Series</span></p> - -<p class="center"><i>Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<p class="center">AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY.</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Another volume in preparation.</i></p> - -<p class="ph1"><span class="antiqua">Pan-American Series</span></p> - -<p class="center"><i>Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.00, net.</i></p> - -<p class="center">LOST ON THE ORINOCO.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_0"></span> -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/frontis.jpg" alt="" /></div> -<p class="caption">Over it went, carrying the boys with it.</p> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/titlepage.jpg" alt="" /></div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> -<div class="titlepage"> -<p class="center"><span class="antiqua"><span class="large">Pan-American Series</span></span></p> - -<hr class="tiny" /> - -<h1>LOST ON THE ORINOCO</h1> - -<p>OR<br /> - -<span class="large">AMERICAN BOYS IN VENEZUELA</span></p> - -<p>BY<br /> - -<span class="large">EDWARD STRATEMEYER</span><br /> - -Author of “With Washington in the West,” “American Boys’ Life of<br /> -William McKinley,” “On to Pekin,” “Between Boer and Briton,”<br /> -“Old Glory Series,” “Ship and Shore Series,”<br /> -“Bound to Succeed Series,” etc.</p> - -<p><i>ILLUSTRATED BY A. B. SHUTE</i></p> - -<p>BOSTON<br /> -LEE AND SHEPARD<br /> -1902</p> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="center">Published in March, 1902<br /> -<br /> - -<span class="smcap">Copyright, 1902, by Lee and Shepard</span></p> -<hr class="tiny" /> -<p class="center"><i>All rights reserved</i></p> -<hr class="tiny" /> -<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Lost on the Orinoco</span></p> - -<p class="center"><span class="antiqua">Norwood Press</span><br /> -<span class="smcap">Berwick</span> & <span class="smcap">Smith</span><br /> -Norwood, Mass.<br /> -U. S. A.</p> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_iii">[iii]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">PREFACE</h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Lost on the Orinoco</span>” is a complete tale in -itself, but forms the first volume of the “Pan-American -Series,” a line of books intended to embrace -sight seeing and adventures in different portions of -the three Americas, especially such portions as lie -outside of the United States.</p> - -<p>The writing of this series has been in the author’s -mind for several years, for it seemed to him that -here were many fields but little known and yet well -worthy the attention of young people, and especially -young men who in business matters may have to -look beyond our own States for their opportunities. -The great Pan-American Exhibition at Buffalo, -N. Y. did much to open the eyes of many regarding -Central and South America, but this exposition, -large as it was, did not tell a hundredth part of the -story. As one gentleman having a Venezuelan exhibit -there expressed it: “To show up Venezuela -properly, we should have to bring half of the Republic<span class="pagenum" id="Page_iv">[iv]</span> -here.” And what is true of Venezuela is -true of all the other countries.</p> - -<p>In this story are related the sight seeing and adventures -of five wide-awake American lads who -visit Venezuela in company with their academy professor, -a teacher who had in former years been a -great traveler and hunter. The party sail from -New York to La Guayra, visit Caracas, the capital, -Macuto, the fashionable seaside resort, and other -points of interest near by; then journey westward -to the Gulf of Maracaibo and the immense lake of -the same name; and at last find themselves on the -waters of the mighty Orinoco, the second largest -stream in South America, a body of water which -maintains a width of three miles at a distance of over -600 miles from the ocean. Coffee and cocoa plantations -are visited, as well as the wonderful gold and -silver mines and the great <i>llanos</i>, or prairies, and the -boys find time hanging anything but heavy on their -hands. Occasionally they get into a difficulty of -more or less importance, but in the end all goes well.</p> - -<p>In the preparation of the historical portions of this -book the very latest American, British and Spanish -authorities have been consulted. Concerning the -coffee, mining and other industries most of the information<span class="pagenum" id="Page_v">[v]</span> -has come from those directly interested -in these branches. This being so, it is hoped that the -work will be found accurate and reliable as well as -interesting.</p> - -<p>Once more thanking the thousands who have read -my previous books for the interest they have shown, -I place this volume in their hands trusting it will -fulfil their every expectation.</p> - -<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Edward Stratemeyer.</span></p> - -<p>April 1, 1902.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_vi">[vi]</span></p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_vii">[vii]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CONTENTS</h2> -</div> - -<table> - -<tr><td><small>CHAPTER</small></td><td class="tdr" colspan="2"><small>PAGE</small></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">I.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Boys Talk It Over</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_1"> 1</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">II.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Preparing for the Start</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_11"> 11</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">III.</td><td> <span class="smcap">On Board the Steamer</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_21"> 21</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">IV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Venezuela, Past and Present</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_33"> 33</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">V.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Hockley Makes a Bosom Friend</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_42"> 42</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">VI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Plan that Failed</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_54"> 54</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">VII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">From Curaçao to La Guayra</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_63"> 63</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">VIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">On a Cliff and Under</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_73"> 73</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">IX.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Hockley Shows His True Colors</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_81"> 81</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">X.</td><td> <span class="smcap">On Mule Back into Caracas</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_90"> 90</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Professor Meets an Old Friend</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_100"> 100</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Markel Again to the Front</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_109"> 109</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Plantation Home in Venezuela</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_119"> 119</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XIV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Loss of Honor and Money</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_131"> 131</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Something About Coffee Growing</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_143"> 143</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XVI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Darry’s Wild Ride</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_151"> 151</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XVII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Talk about Beasts and Snakes</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_159"> 159</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XVIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Bitter Discovery</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_168"> 168</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XIX.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Bathing at Macuto</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_177"> 177</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XX.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Short Voyage Westward</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_186"> 186</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Squall on Lake Maracaibo</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_196"> 196</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Port of the Hair</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_205"> 205</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Stop at Trinidad</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_214"> 214</a><span class="pagenum" id="Page_viii">[viii]</span></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXIV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Up the River to Bolivar</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_224"> 224</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Something About Cocoa and Chocolate</span>     </td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_234"> 234</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXVI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Camping on the Upper Orinoco</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_242"> 242</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXVII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Bringing Down an Ocelot</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_251"> 251</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXVIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Monkeys and a Canoe</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_261"> 261</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXIX.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Lost on the Orinoco</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_270"> 270</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXX.</td><td> <span class="smcap">In the Depths of the Jungle</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_279"> 279</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXXI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Hockley and the Boa-Constrictor</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_287"> 287</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXXII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Peep at Gold and Silver Mines</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_296"> 296</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr">XXXIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Together Again—Conclusion</span></td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_304"> 304</a></td></tr> -</table> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_ix">[ix]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">ILLUSTRATIONS</h2> -</div> - -<table> -<tr><td>“Over it went, carrying the boys with it” (p. <a href="#Page_297">297</a>)</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_0"> <i>Frontispiece</i></a></td></tr> - -<tr><td class="tdr" colspan="2"><small>PAGE</small></td></tr> - -<tr><td>“Stay where you are!”</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_47"> 47</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>A big mass of dirt came down</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_80"> 80</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>“I’ve got it,” he muttered</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_142"> 142</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>“You have some baggage, that bag. I shall hold it.”</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_173"> 173</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>“I heard something, what was it?”</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_203"> 203</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>“Take it off, do!”</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_249"> 249</a></td></tr> - -<tr><td>“Help! Save me!” screamed the unfortunate youth</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_291"> 291</a></td></tr> -</table> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1">[1]</span> - -<p class="ph2">LOST ON THE ORINOCO</p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER I<br /> - -<small>THE BOYS TALK IT OVER</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Hurrah</span>, Mark, it’s settled at last.”</p> - -<p>“What is settled, Frank?”</p> - -<p>“We are to go to Venezuela and other places in -South America. My father just got the word from -Professor Strong. I brought the letter along for -you to read.”</p> - -<p>“That’s certainly immense news,” remarked -Mark Robertson, as he took the letter which Frank -Newton held out to him. “Does he say how soon -he will be able to start?”</p> - -<p>“Just as soon as he can settle up affairs at Lakeview -Academy. I suppose he’s got quite something -to do there yet. But we can hurry him along, can’t -we?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think you’ll hurry the professor much,”<span class="pagenum" id="Page_2">[2]</span> -answered Mark, as he began to read the communication -which had been passed to him. “He’s one of -the kind that is slow but sure—not but that he can -move quick enough, when you least expect it.”</p> - -<p>“As for instance on the night we tried to hide all -the schoolbooks in the old boathouse,” responded -Frank, with a twinkle in his eye. “He caught us -neatly, didn’t he?”</p> - -<p>“That’s what. Hullo! So Beans and Darry are -going, too. I like that first rate. Beans is all right, -even if he is from Boston, and Darry will furnish -fun enough for a minstrel show.”</p> - -<p>“To be sure. I wouldn’t want to go if they -weren’t along, and you. But do you see what the -professor says on the last page? He wants to take -Jake the Glum along too.”</p> - -<p>At this the face of Mark Robinson fell somewhat. -“I wish he had left Glummy out,” he said. “He -knows the fellow is sour to the last degree and a -bully in the bargain.”</p> - -<p>“I guess the professor wants to reform him, -Mark.”</p> - -<p>“He’ll have up-hill work doing it. Glummy has -been at the academy two years and I know him -pretty thoroughly.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_3">[3]</span>“Well, he’ll be the richest boy in the crowd. Perhaps -that had something to do with taking him -along.”</p> - -<p>“No, the professor doesn’t think so much of -money as that. Each person in the crowd will have -to pay his share of the expenses and his share of the -professor’s salary, and that’s all, outside of the incidentals.”</p> - -<p>“I wonder if the incidentals won’t be rather -high.”</p> - -<p>“I fancy we can make them as high as we please—buying -souvenirs and things like that. You can -be sure Glummy will try his best to cut a wide swath -if he gets the chance.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps the professor will hold him in. But -it’s great news, isn’t it?” And in his enthusiasm -Frank began to dance an impromptu jig on the -library floor.</p> - -<p>Frank Newton was a New York city youth, sixteen -years of age, tall, well-built and rather good -looking. He was the only son of a Wall Street -banker, and if his parent was not a millionaire he was -exceedingly well to do. The lad resided in the fashionable -part of Madison Avenue when at home, -which was not often, for his family were fond of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_4">[4]</span> -going abroad, and either took the boy with them or -sent him to boarding school.</p> - -<p>Directly opposite the home of the Newtons lived -the Robertson family, consisting of Mr. and Mrs. -Robertson, Mark, and several smaller children. Mr. -Robertson was a dry goods importer who owned an -interest in several mills in England and Scotland, -and he made trips across the Atlantic semi-yearly.</p> - -<p>Although Mark Robertson was a year older than -Frank Newton, the two lads were warm friends and -had gone to school together for years. Their earlier -education had been had in the city, but when Frank -was eleven and Mark twelve both had been packed -off to Lakeview Academy, a small but well conducted -school nestling among the hills of New -Hampshire.</p> - -<p>Five years of life at the academy had made the -place seem like a second home to the boys. The -master, Professor Amos Strong, was a thorough -gentleman and scholar, and under his guidance the -boys progressed rapidly in all their studies. The -professor had in his day been both a traveler and -hunter, and the stories he was wont to relate during -off hours were fascinating to the last degree.</p> - -<p>As might be expected, the boys, while at school,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_5">[5]</span> -made many friends and also an enemy or two, although -as regards the latter, the enmity was never -very deep, for Professor Strong would not tolerate -anything underhanded or sneakish.</p> - -<p>Next to Mark, Frank’s dearest chum at the -academy was Dartworth Crane, a slightly built boy -of fifteen, who was as full of fun as a boy can well -be. Dartworth, or “Darry” as he was always called -for short, was the son of a rich Chicago cattle dealer, -and the boy’s earlier days had been spent on a ranch -in Montana. He loved to race on horseback and -hunt and fish, and the master sometimes had all he -could do to hold the sunny but impetuous lad within -proper bounds.</p> - -<p>As Frank had another chum, so did Mark, in the -person of Samuel Winthrop, the son of a well-to-do -widow who resided in the Back Bay district of Boston. -Samuel was a tall, studious looking individual, -with a high forehead and a thick mass of curly black -hair. Because he came from Boston, he had been -nick-named “Beans,” and although he did not relish -the <i>sobriquet</i> it was likely to stick to him for years -to come.</p> - -<p>Among the lads to join those at the academy two -years before had been Jacob Hockley, a thin, lank<span class="pagenum" id="Page_6">[6]</span> -youth of Mark’s age, with a white freckled face -and hair strongly inclined to be red. Hockley was -the only son and heir of a millionaire lumber dealer -of Pennsylvania. His manner was peculiar, at times -exceedingly “bossy” as the others declared, and -then again morose and sour, the latter mood having -won for him the nickname of “Glummy” or “Jake -the Glum.” Hockley was given to spending his -money, of which he had more than was good for -him, freely, but even this had failed to make him any -substantial friends.</p> - -<p>The enmity between Hockley on one side, and -Frank and Mark on the other, had arisen over the -captaincy of the academy baseball team the summer -previous. Jake wished to be the captain of the team, -and had done his best to persuade or buy the boys -over to vote for him. But Frank had advocated -Mark for the captaincy, and Mark had won, much -to the lank youth’s discomfiture.</p> - -<p>“You’ll never win a game with Mark Robertson -as captain and with Frank Newton on first-base,” -had been Jake’s sour comment, but he was sadly -mistaken. That summer the team played nine games -with the teams from rival schools, and won seven of -the contests. The winning made Jake Hockley<span class="pagenum" id="Page_7">[7]</span> -more down on Mark and Frank than ever, but as the -others were popular he had often to conceal his -real feelings.</p> - -<p>On a windy night in June the cry of “fire!” had -aroused every inmate of Lakeview Academy from his -bed, and had caused all to leave the rambling building -in a hurry. The conflagration had started in the -laundry, and from this room quickly communicated -to the kitchen, dining hall, and then the remainder -of the stone and wood structure. In such a high -wind, the fire department from the village, two miles -away, could do little or nothing, and the efforts of -the students, headed by the several teachers, were -likewise of no avail. Inside of three hours everything -was swept away and only a cellar full of -blackened debris marked the spot where the picturesque -academy had once stood.</p> - -<p>Under such circumstances many a man would -have been too stunned to act immediately, but ere -the stones of the building were cold, Professor -Strong was laying his plans with the insurance companies -for the erection of a new and better structure. -The students were cared for at some neighboring -houses and then refitted with clothing and sent home.</p> - -<p>During the fall there had been much talk of a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_8">[8]</span> -personally conducted tour to South America during -the coming year, the tour to be under the guidance -of Professor Strong, who had been South a number -of times before. Letters had been sent to the parents -of various students, but nothing definite had been -done up to the time the fire occurred.</p> - -<p>Mark and Frank had planned for the trip South, -and could not bear to think of giving it up, and as -soon as Professor Strong was in a position to give -them his attention, Frank had gotten his father to -write concerning it. Several letters passed, and at -last Professor Strong decided to leave the building -and the management of the new academy to his -brother, who had just left the faculty of Harvard, -and go with the boys.</p> - -<p>While the trip was being talked of at the academy, -previous to the fire, Jake Hockley had announced -his determination to go, but since the boys had separated, -nothing more had been heard from the lank -youth, and Mark and Frank were hoping he had -given the plan up. The announcement therefore, -that he would make one of the party, put a damper -on their enthusiasm.</p> - -<p>“He’ll get us into some kind of trouble before we<span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">[9]</span> -get back, you see if he doesn’t,” was Frank’s comment.</p> - -<p>“I’ll make him keep his distance,” was Mark’s -reply. “If he attempts to go too far I’ll show him -that I won’t stand any nonsense.”</p> - -<p>The party of six were to leave for Venezuela by -way of New York city, and a few days after the conversation -just recorded Sam Winthrop came down -on the train from Boston, to remain with Mark until -the arrival of the professor.</p> - -<p>“Beans, by all that’s delightful!” cried Mark, as -he wrung his friend’s hand. “So glad you came a -few days ahead.”</p> - -<p>“I wanted a chance to look around New York,” -answered Sam Winthrop. “I’ve never had a chance -before, you know.”</p> - -<p>“You shall look around, all you please, and Frank -and I will go with you.”</p> - -<p>“Is Darry here yet?”</p> - -<p>“No, but Frank expects him to-morrow. Then -we can all go around until Professor Strong arrives. -But say, what do you think about Glummy going?” -and Mark looked anxious.</p> - -<p>“Can’t say that I am overjoyed, Mark.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_10">[10]</span>“I wish it was anybody but Hockley—and Frank -wishes the same.”</p> - -<p>“Well, all arrangements have been made, so we’ll -have to make the best of it. But I heard one thing -that doesn’t please me,” went on Sam. “I got a -letter from Dick Mason, and in it he said Glummy -was talking of the trip to some of his chums, and -said he was going just to show Frank and you a -thing or two.”</p> - -<p>“Did he? I wonder what he meant?”</p> - -<p>“He didn’t mean anything very good, you can -be sure of that, Mark.”</p> - -<p>“You are right. We’ll certainly have to keep our -eyes open and watch him,” concluded Mark, seriously.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">[11]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER II<br /> - -<small>PREPARING FOR THE START</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">On</span> the following morning Darry Crane came in, -on the Limited Express direct from Chicago. He -sent a telegram ahead, to Frank, who went up to -the Grand Central depot to meet his chum.</p> - -<p>“Had a fine trip,” said Darry, “but, honest, I -couldn’t get here fast enough, I’ve been that anxious -to see you. Heard from Beans yet? I’ll wager he -comes down with his grip loaded with beans, on -account of the long trip, you know. What, didn’t -bring any beans? Must be a mistake about that.”</p> - -<p>“I guess he was afraid you’d forget the pork,” -answered Frank, with a laugh. “But how have you -been since you left school?”</p> - -<p>“First-class. Went West, you know, with my -father and nearly rode a pony to death on the Lone -Star ranch. Oh, it was glorious to get over the -ground. Beats a stuffy old city all to bits. Hold -on, I’ve got to look after my trunk. Wouldn’t want<span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">[12]</span> -to lose that, for it’s got the whole outfit for the trip -in it.”</p> - -<p>“Our man will have the trunk brought to our -house,” answered Frank. “You come with me, and -I’ll take you down to Mark’s, where you’ll find -Beans. By the way, heard anything of Glummy?”</p> - -<p>“Did I? Well, I just guess, Frank. What do you -think? He actually paid me a visit—not very long, -of course, but still he came to see me. Said he was -passing through Chicago on a trip to St. Louis, and -felt that he had to hunt up an old chum. I almost -fainted when he said it. But he acted quite decent, -I must admit, not a bit airish or sour either.”</p> - -<p>“Did he say anything about this trip to South -America?”</p> - -<p>“Not much, excepting that he would like to go -if it went through. I didn’t say much either, for -I was thinking you and Mark wouldn’t like to have -him along. You don’t, do you?”</p> - -<p>“Not much, although I guess we can stand it -if he lets us alone. We needn’t have much to do -with him.”</p> - -<p>Taking Darry’s valise from him, Frank led the -way to the street and hailed a passing auto-cab, and -both were speedily taken to the home on Madison<span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">[13]</span> -Avenue. A few minutes later they hurried across -the way and joined Mark and Sam.</p> - -<p>In anticipation of the good times ahead, all four -of the lads were in a happy frame of mind, and the -remainder of the day was spent by the New Yorkers -in showing the visitors around Central Park and -other points of interest. In the afternoon the four -went downtown and crossed the Brooklyn Bridge. -Then they came back to the Battery and took the -little craft which plies hourly between that point and -Bedloe’s Island, where is located the Statue of -Liberty, standing as a gigantic sentinel to New York -Bay.</p> - -<p>“How big it looks when one is close to it,” remarked -Sam, when they disembarked close to the -base of the statue. “I thought climbing to the top -would be easy, but I fancy it’s going to be as tedious -as climbing to the top of Bunker Hill monument.”</p> - -<p>And so it proved, as they went up the dark and -narrow circular steps leading to the crown of the -statue. They wished to go up into the torch, but -the way was blocked owing to repairs.</p> - -<p>Suddenly Mark, on looking around him, uttered -an exclamation of surprise. “Glummy Hockley! -How did you get here?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">[14]</span>His words caused the others to forget their sight -seeing for the moment, and they faced about, to find -themselves confronted by the freckled-faced youth, -who had been gazing in the opposite direction.</p> - -<p>“I’ll thank you not to call me ‘Glummy,’” said -Hockley, coolly, although he too was taken by surprise. -Then he turned to Darry. “How do you -do, Darry? When did you arrive?”</p> - -<p>Mark bit his lip and looked at Frank, who gave -him a knowing look in return. Clearly it had been -an ill beginning to the conversation. Somehow -Mark felt as if he had not done just right.</p> - -<p>“Excuse me, Glum—I mean Hockley, I’ll try to -remember your proper name after this,” he stammered.</p> - -<p>“I don’t mind those things at school, but you -must remember we are not at school now,” went on -Hockley, with something of an air of importance. -Then he smiled faintly at Sam. “How are you, -Beans?”</p> - -<p>“Excuse me, but we are not at school now, and -my name’s not ‘Beans,’” was the dry response.</p> - -<p>There was a second of silence, and then Darry -burst into a roar of laughter, and Frank and Mark -were compelled to follow, the whole thing seemed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">[15]</span> -so comical. Hockley grew red, but when Sam -joined in the merriment he felt compelled to smile -himself, although he looked more sour than ever -directly afterward.</p> - -<p>“All right, Sam, I’ll try to remember,” he said -with an effort, and held out his hand.</p> - -<p>The two shook hands and then the lank youth -shook hands with Darry. After this there was nothing -to do but for Frank and Mark to take Hockley’s -hand also, and this they did, although stiffly.</p> - -<p>But the ice was broken and soon all were talking -as a crowd of boys usually do. Hockley had -brought a field glass with him and insisted on all -using it.</p> - -<p>“Bought it down in Maiden Lane this morning,” -he remarked. “Got the address of a first-class firm -from a friend who knows all about such things. It -cost me sixty-five dollars, but I reckon it’s worth it. -Ain’t many better glasses around. I expect it will -be just the thing in Venezuela.”</p> - -<p>“No doubt,” said Darry, but felt somewhat disgusted -over Hockley’s air of importance. Nevertheless, -the glass was a fine one, and everybody enjoyed -looking through it. Ships coming up the -Lower Bay could be seen at a long distance, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">[16]</span> -they could also see over Brooklyn and Long Island, -and over Jersey City and Newark to the Orange -Mountains.</p> - -<p>“What are you fellows going to do to-night?” -questioned Hockley, when they were going down -the stairs again.</p> - -<p>“We thought something of going to Manhattan -Beach to see the fireworks——” began Frank, and -broke off short.</p> - -<p>“I was thinking of going to Coney Island,” went -on the lank youth. “Supposing we all go there? -I’ll foot the bill.”</p> - -<p>“I shouldn’t care to go to Coney Island, and I -don’t think Darry and Sam will care either,” said -Mark.</p> - -<p>“Let us all go to Manhattan,” broke in Sam. -“I’ve often heard of the fireworks.” He had not -the heart to give Hockley too much of a cold -shoulder.</p> - -<p>So it was arranged, on the way back to the Battery, -and then there was nothing to do but ask the -lank youth to dine with them.</p> - -<p>“We are bound to have Glummy on us, sooner or -later,” whispered Mark to Frank, while they were -eating. “Perhaps it’s just as well to make the best<span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">[17]</span> -of it. It will be time enough to turn on him when -he does something which is openly offensive.”</p> - -<p>When it came time to settle the bill, the lank -youth wished to pay for everybody, but the others -would not allow this.</p> - -<p>“Let everybody pay for himself,” said Darry. -“Then there won’t be any trouble.”</p> - -<p>“I can pay as well as not,” said Hockley, sourly.</p> - -<p>“So can any of us,” returned Mark, dryly; and -there the subject dropped.</p> - -<p>The trip to Manhattan Beach and the fireworks -were very enjoyable, and before the evening came -to an end everybody was in a much better humor, -although both Mark and Frank felt that they would -have enjoyed the trip more had Hockley not been -present.</p> - -<p>Hockley was stopping at the Astor House, and -left them near the entrance to the Brooklyn Bridge. -He had wanted them to have a late supper with him, -and had even mentioned wine, but all had declined, -stating they were tired and wished to go to bed.</p> - -<p>“He must be getting to be a regular high-flyer if -he uses much wine,” remarked Frank when the four -were on their way uptown. “What a fool he is -with his money. He thinks that covers everything.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">[18]</span>“He’ll be foolish to take to drink,” returned -Darry. “It has ruined many a rich young fellow, -and he ought to know it.”</p> - -<p>“I think Hockley would be all right if it wasn’t -for the high opinion he has of himself,” came from -Sam. “But his patronizing way of talking is what -irritates. He considers nobody as important as himself. -In one way I think he’d be better off if he was -poor.”</p> - -<p>“The family haven’t been rich very long—only -eight or ten years, so I’ve heard,” said Mark. “Poor -Hockley isn’t used to it yet. It will be a lesson to -him to learn that there are lots of other rich folks -in this world who aren’t making any fuss and -feathers about it.”</p> - -<p>In the morning came a message from Professor -Strong, stating that he had arrived, and was stopping -at the Hotel Manhattan. He added that he would -see Mr. Robertson and Mr. Newton that morning, -and would be at the service of the boys directly after -lunch.</p> - -<p>“Now we won’t lose much more time,” cried -Frank. “I declare I wish we were to sail for Venezuela -to-day.”</p> - -<p>“I fancy the professor has a good many arrangements<span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">[19]</span> -to make,” said Sam. “It’s quite a trip we are -contemplating, remember.”</p> - -<p>“Pooh! it’s not such a trip to Caracas,” returned -Darry. “My father was down there once—looking -at a coffee plantation.”</p> - -<p>“A trip to Caracas wouldn’t be so much, Darry,” -said Mark. “But you must remember that we are -going further,—to the great lake of Maracaibo, and -then around to the mouth of the Orinoco, and hundreds -of miles up that immense stream. They tell -me that the upper end of the Orinoco is as yet practically -unexplored.”</p> - -<p>“Hurrah! we’ll become the Young Explorers!” -cried Darry, enthusiastically. “Say, I wonder if -the professor will want us to go armed?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think so,” said Frank. “He’ll go armed, -and as he is a crack shot I guess that will do for the -lot of us.”</p> - -<p>“Glummy showed me a pearl-handled pistol he -had just bought,” put in Sam. “He said it cost -him sixteen dollars.”</p> - -<p>“He’d be sure to mention the price,” said Frank, -with a sickly grin. “I’d like to see him face some -wild beast—I’ll wager he’d drop his pistol and run -for his life.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">[20]</span>“Maybe somebody else would run, too,” came -from Mark. “I don’t believe it’s much fun to stand -up in front of a big wild animal.”</p> - -<p>“Are there any such in Venezuela?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know—we’ll have to ask the professor.”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">[21]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER III<br /> - -<small>ON BOARD THE STEAMER</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">When</span> the boys presented themselves at Professor -Strong’s room at the Hotel Manhattan they -found that worthy man looking over a number of -purchases he had made while on his trip downtown.</p> - -<p>“Glad to see you, boys,” he said, as he shook one -and another by the hand. “I trust you are all feeling -well.”</p> - -<p>“Haven’t been sick a minute this summer,” answered -Darry, and the others said about the same.</p> - -<p>“I see you have your firearms with you,” remarked -Mark, as he gazed at a rifle and a double-barreled -shotgun standing in a corner. “We were -wondering if we were to go armed.”</p> - -<p>“I shouldn’t feel at home without my guns,” returned -the professor with a smile. “You see that -comes from being a confirmed old hunter. I don’t -anticipate any use for them except when I go hunting. -As for your going armed, I have already arranged -with your parents about that. I shall take<span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">[22]</span> -a shotgun for each, also a pistol, for use when we are -in the wilds of the upper Orinoco.”</p> - -<p>“Will you lead us on a regular hunt?” asked -Darry, eagerly.</p> - -<p>“I will if you’ll promise to behave and not get -into unnecessary difficulties.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll promise,” came from all.</p> - -<p>“I have been making a number of purchases,” -continued Professor Strong. “But I must make a -number more, and if you wish you can go along -and help me make the selections.”</p> - -<p>“Is Glummy—I mean is Jake Hockley coming up -here?” questioned Mark.</p> - -<p>“I expected him to come with you. Isn’t he stopping -with one of you?”</p> - -<p>“No, he’s stopping at the Astor House,” came -from Frank.</p> - -<p>There was an awkward pause, which was very -suggestive, and the professor noted it. With his -gun in hand he faced the four.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid you do not care much to have Master -Hockley along,” he said, slowly.</p> - -<p>“Oh, I reckon we can get along,” answered -Darry, after the others had failed to speak.</p> - -<p>“It is unfortunate that you are not all the best of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">[23]</span> -friends. But Hockley asked me about the trip a -long while ago and when it came to the point I -could not see how I could refuse him. Besides that, -I was thinking that perhaps the trip would do him -good. I trust you will treat him fairly.”</p> - -<p>“Of course we’ll do that,” said Mark, slowly.</p> - -<p>“I guess there won’t be any trouble,” said Frank, -but deep in his heart he feared otherwise.</p> - -<p>“Hockley has not had the benefits of much traveling,” -continued the professor. “And traveling -broadens the mind. The trip will do us all good.”</p> - -<p>They were soon on their way to Fourteenth -Street, and then Broadway, and at several stores -the professor purchased the articles he had put down -on his list. The boys all helped to carry these back -to the hotel. On arriving they found Jake Hockley -sitting in the reception room awaiting them.</p> - -<p>The face of the lank youth fell when he saw that -they had been out on a tour without him. “I’d been -up earlier if you had sent me word,” he said to the -professor. “I suppose I’ve got to get a lot of things -myself, haven’t I?”</p> - -<p>“You have your clothing, haven’t you?—I mean -the list I sent to you?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_24">[24]</span>“Then you are all right, for I have the other -things.”</p> - -<p>From the professor the boys learned that the -steamer for La Guayra, the nearest seaport to Caracas, -the capital of Venezuela, would sail three days -later.</p> - -<p>“There is a sailing every ten days,” said Professor -Strong. “The steamers are not as large as -those which cross the Atlantic but they are almost -as comfortable, and I have seen to it that we shall -have the best of the staterooms. The trip will take -just a week, unless we encounter a severe storm -which drives us back.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t want to meet a storm,” said Hockley.</p> - -<p>“Afraid of getting seasick,” came from Frank.</p> - -<p>“Not exactly,” snapped the lank youth. “Perhaps -you’ll get seasick yourself.”</p> - -<p>“Does this steamer belong to the only line running -to Venezuela?” asked Sam.</p> - -<p>“This is the only regular passenger line. There -are other lines, carrying all sorts of freight, which -run at irregular intervals, and then there are sailing -vessels which often stop there in going up or down -the coast.”</p> - -<p>The three days to follow passed swiftly, for at the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">[25]</span> -last moment the professor and the boys found plenty -of things to do. On the day when the steamer was -to sail, Sam’s mother came down from Boston to -see her son off, and the parents of Mark and Frank -were also on hand, so that there was quite a family -gathering. The baggage was already aboard, a -trunk and a traveling case for each, as well as a -leather bag for the guns and ammunition.</p> - -<p>At last came the familiar cry, “All ashore that’s -going!” and the last farewells were said. A few -minutes later the gang-plank was withdrawn and the -lines unloosened. As the big steamer began to -move, something like a lump arose in Frank’s -throat.</p> - -<p>“We’re off!” he whispered to Mark. “Guess -it’s going to be a long time before we get back.”</p> - -<p>Mark did not answer, for he was busy waving his -handkerchief to his folks. Frank turned to Sam -and saw that the tears were standing in the latter’s -eyes, for Sam had caught sight of his mother in the -act of wiping her eyes. Even Darry and Hockley -were unusually sober.</p> - -<p>In quarter of an hour, however, the strain was -over, and then the boys gave themselves up to the -contemplation of the scene before them. Swiftly<span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">[26]</span> -the steamer was plying her way between the ferry-boats -and craft that crowded the stream. Soon the -Battery was passed and the Statue of Liberty, and -the tall buildings of the great metropolis began to -fade away in the blue haze of the distance. The -course was through the Narrows to the Lower Bay -and then straight past Sandy Hook Light into the -broad and sparkling Atlantic.</p> - -<p>“Take a good look at the light and the highlands -below,” said the professor, as he sat beside the boys -at the rail. “That’s the last bit of United States -territory you’ll see for a long while to come—unless -you catch sight of Porto Rico, which is doubtful.”</p> - -<p>“Won’t we stand in to shore when we round Cape -Hatteras?” asked Hockley.</p> - -<p>“We shall not have to round Cape Hatteras, -Hockley. Instead of hugging the eastern shore of -the United States the steamer will sail almost due -South for the Mona Passage on the west of Porto -Rico. This will bring us into the Caribbean Sea, -and then we shall sail somewhat westward for a -brief stop at Curaçao, a Dutch island north of the -coast of Venezuela. It is not a large place, but one -of considerable importance. The submarine cable -from Cuba to Venezuela has a station there.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">[27]</span>“I’m going to study the map of Venezuela,” said -Mark. “I know something about it already, but -not nearly as much as I’d like to.”</p> - -<p>“To-morrow I’ll show you a large map of the -country, which I have brought along,” answered -Professor Strong. “And I’ll give you a little talk -on the history of the people. But to-day you had -better spend your time in making yourselves at -home on the ship.”</p> - -<p>“I’m going to look at the engine room,” said -Frank, who was interested in machinery, and down -he went, accompanied by Darry. It was a beautiful -sight, to see the triple expansion engines working -so swiftly and yet so noiselessly, but it was frightfully -hot below decks, and they did not remain as -long as they had anticipated.</p> - -<p>They were now out of sight of land, and the long -swells of the Atlantic caused the steamer to roll not -a little. They found Sam huddled in a corner of the -deck, looking as pale as a sheet.</p> - -<p>“Hullo, what’s up?” queried Frank, although he -knew perfectly well.</p> - -<p>“Nothing’s up,” was the reply, given with an -effort. “But I guess there will be something up -soon,” and then Sam rushed off to his stateroom,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">[28]</span> -and that was the last seen of him for that -day.</p> - -<p>Mark was also slightly seasick, and thought best -to lie down. Hockley was strolling the deck in deep -contempt of those who had been taken ill.</p> - -<p>“I can’t see why anybody should get sick,” he -sneered. “I’m sure there’s nothing to get sick -about.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t crow, Glum—I mean Jake,” said Frank. -“Your turn may come next.”</p> - -<p>“Me? I won’t get sick.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t be too sure.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll bet you five dollars I don’t get sick,” insisted -the lank youth.</p> - -<p>“We’re not betting to-day,” put in Darry. “I -hope you don’t get sick, but—I wouldn’t be too sure -about it.” And he and Frank walked away.</p> - -<p>“What an awful blower he is,” said Frank, when -they were out of hearing. “As if a person could -help being sick if the beastly thing got around to -him. I must confess I don’t feel very well myself.”</p> - -<p>“Nor I,” answered Darry, more soberly than -ever.</p> - -<p>Dinner was served in the dining saloon at six -o’clock, as elaborate a repast as at any leading hotel.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">[29]</span> -But though the first-class passengers numbered forty -only a dozen came to the table. Of the boys only -Frank and Hockley were present, and it must be confessed -that Frank’s appetite was very poor. Hockley -appeared to be in the best of spirits and ate heartily.</p> - -<p>“This is usually the case,” said the professor, -after having seen to it that the others were as comfortable -as circumstances permitted. “But it won’t -last, and that is a comfort. Hockley, if I were you, -I would not eat too heartily.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, it won’t hurt me,” was the off-hand answer. -“The salt air just suits me. I never felt better in -my life.”</p> - -<p>“I am glad to hear it, and trust it keeps on doing -you good.”</p> - -<p>Frank and Mark had a stateroom together and so -had Sam and Darry. Hockley had stipulated that -he have a stateroom to himself, and this had been -provided. The professor occupied a room with a -Dutch merchant bound for Curaçao, a jolly, good-natured -gentleman, who was soon on good terms -with all of the party.</p> - -<p>There was but little sleep for any of the boys during -the earlier part of the night, for a stiff breeze -was blowing and the steamer rolled worse than ever.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">[30]</span> -But by three o’clock in the morning the wind went -down and the sea seemed to grow easier, and all fell -into a light slumber, from which Mark was the first -to awaken.</p> - -<p>“I feel better, although pretty weak,” he said, -with an attempt at a smile. “How is it with you, -Frank?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I didn’t catch it very badly.”</p> - -<p>“Did Glummy get sick?”</p> - -<p>“No.”</p> - -<p>“He’s in luck. How he will crow over us.”</p> - -<p>“If he starts to crow we’ll shut him up,” answered -Frank, firmly.</p> - -<p>They were soon dressed and into the stateroom -occupied by Sam and Darry.</p> - -<p>“Thanks, I’m myself again,” said Darry. “And -why shouldn’t I be? I’m so clean inside I feel fairly -polished. I can tell you, there’s nothing like a good -dose of <i>mal de mer</i>, as the French call it, to turn one -inside out.”</p> - -<p>“And how are you, Beans?” asked Mark.</p> - -<p>“I think I’m all here, but I’m not sure,” came -from Sam. “But isn’t it a shame we should all be -sick and Hockley should escape?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">[31]</span>“Oh, he’s so thick-skinned the disease can’t strike -through,” returned Frank.</p> - -<p>He had scarcely uttered the words when Darry, -who had stepped out into the gangway between the -staterooms came back with a peculiar smile on his -face.</p> - -<p>“He’s got ’em,” he said.</p> - -<p>“He? Who? What has he got?” asked the -others in a breath.</p> - -<p>“Glummy. He’s seasick, and he’s in his room -doing more groaning than a Scotch bagpipe. Come -and listen. But don’t make any noise.”</p> - -<p>Silently the quartet tiptoed their way out of the -stateroom and to the door of the apartment occupied -by Hockley. For a second there was silence. Then -came a turning of a body on a berth and a prolonged -groan of misery.</p> - -<p>“Oh, why did I come out here,” came from Hockley. -“Oh dear, my head! Everything’s going round -and round! Oh, if only this old tub would stop rolling -for a minute—just a minute!” And then came -another series of groans, followed by sounds which -suggested that poor Hockley was about as sick as a -boy can well be.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">[32]</span>“Let’s give him a cheer, just to brace him up,” -suggested Frank, in a whisper.</p> - -<p>“Just the thing,” came from Darry. “My, but -won’t it make him boiling mad!”</p> - -<p>But Mark interposed. “No, don’t do it, fellows, -he feels bad enough already. Come on and leave -him alone,” and this advice was followed and they -went on deck. Here they met the professor, who -wanted to know if they had seen Hockley.</p> - -<p>“No, sir, but we heard him,” said Sam. “He’s -in a bad way, and perhaps he’d like to see you.”</p> - -<p>At this Professor Strong’s face became a study. -Clearly he knew what was in the boys’ minds, but -he did not betray it. Yet he had to smile when he -was by himself. He went to see Hockley, and he -did not re-appear on deck until two hours later.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">[33]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IV<br /> - -<small>VENEZUELA, PAST AND PRESENT</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Supposing</span> we now look at that map of Venezuela -and learn a little about the history of the -country,” said Professor Strong, immediately after -the lunch hour and when all was quiet on board the -steamer. “We can get in a corner of the cabin, and -I don’t think anybody will disturb us.”</p> - -<p>Ordinarily the boys would not have taken to -anything in the shape of a lecture, but they were -anxious to know something more of the locality -they were to visit, and so all readily agreed to follow -Professor Strong to the nook he had selected. Hockley -was still absent, and the others asked no questions -concerning him. The professor hung up his -map and sat on a chair before it, and the lads drew -up camp chairs in a semi-circle before him.</p> - -<p>“As you will see by the map, Venezuela lies on -the north coast of South America,” began Professor -Strong. “It is bounded on the north by the Caribbean -Sea, on the east by British Guiana, on the south<span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">[34]</span> -by Brazil and on the west by Colombia. It is irregular -in shape, and its greatest length is from -south-east to north-west, about twelve hundred -miles, or by comparison, about the distance from -Maine to Minnesota or California to Kansas.”</p> - -<p>“Phew! that’s larger than I thought,” came from -Frank, in an undertone.</p> - -<p>“Many of the South American republics are -larger than most people realize,” went on the professor. -“Venezuela has an estimated area of nearly -598,000 miles—to give it in round figures. -That is as large as all of the New England States -and half a dozen other States combined. The -country has over a thousand rivers, large and small, -over two hundred of which flow into the Caribbean -Sea, and four hundred helping to swell the size of -the mighty Orinoco, which, as you already know, -is the second largest river in South America,—the -largest being the Amazon of Brazil. The Orinoco -is a worthy rival of our own Mississippi, and I am -afraid you will find it just as muddy and full of -snags and bars.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind, we’ll get through somehow,” put -in Darry, and his dry way of saying it made even -the professor laugh.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">[35]</span>“Besides the rivers, there are a number of lakes -and bays. Of the former, the largest is Lake Maracaibo, -with an area of 2,100 square miles.”</p> - -<p>“That must be the Maracaibo coffee district,” -suggested Mark.</p> - -<p>“To a large extent it is, for the lake is surrounded -by coffee and cocoa plantations. In the interior is -another body of water, Lake Valencia, which possesses -the peculiarity of being elevated nearly 1,700 -feet above the ocean level. All told, the country is -well watered and consequently vegetation is abundant.”</p> - -<p>“But I thought it was filled up with mountains?” -came from Sam.</p> - -<p>“A large part of the country is mountainous, as -you can see by the map, but there are also immense -plains, commonly called <i>llanos</i>. The great Andes -chain strikes Venezuela on the west and here divides -into two sections, one running northward toward -the Caribbean Sea and the other to the north-eastward. -Some parts of these chains are very high, -and at a point about a hundred miles south of Lake -Maracaibo there are two peaks which are each over -15,000 feet high and are perpetually covered with -snow.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">[36]</span>“I guess we won’t climb them,” observed -Sam.</p> - -<p>“I hardly think so myself, Samuel, although we -may get a good view of them from a distance, when -we visit Lake Maracaibo. Besides these chains of -mountains there are others to the southward, and -here the wilderness is so complete that it has not yet -been thoroughly explored. It is a land full of mountain -torrents, and one of these, after flowing through -many plains and valleys, unites the Orinoco with the -Amazon, although the watercourse is not fit for navigation -by even fair sized boats.”</p> - -<p>“What about the people?” asked Mark, after a -long pause, during which all of them examined the -map more closely, and the professor pointed out La -Guayra, Caracas, and a dozen or more other places -of importance.</p> - -<p>“The people are of Spanish, Indian and mixed -blood, with a fair sprinkling of Americans and -Europeans. There has been no accurate census -taken for a number of years, but the population is -put down as over two and three quarters millions -and of this number about three hundred thousand -are Indians.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">[37]</span>“Are those Indians like our own?” questioned -Darry.</p> - -<p>“A great deal like the Indians of the old south-west, -excepting that they are much more peaceful. -You can travel almost anywhere in Venezuela, and -if you mind your own business it is rarely that an -Indian or a negro will molest you. And now let -me ask if any of you know what the name Venezuela -means?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t,” said Frank, and the others shook their -heads.</p> - -<p>“The name Venezuela means Little Venice. The -north shore was discovered by Columbus in 1498. -One year later a Castilian knight named Ojeda -came westward, accompanied by Amerigo Vespucci, -and the pair with their four ships sailed from the -mouth of the Orinoco to the Isthmus of Panama. -They also explored part of Lake Maracaibo, and -when Vespucci saw the natives floating around in -their canoes it reminded him of Venice in Italy, with -its canals and gondolas, and he named the country -Little Venice, or Venezuela. When Vespucci got -home he wrote an elaborate account of his voyage, -and this so pleased those in authority they immediately<span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">[38]</span> -called the entire country America, in his honor, -and America it has been ever since.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but it ought to be called Columbia,” put -in Frank, as the professor paused.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you are right, Newton, but it’s too late -to change it now. The Spaniards made the first -settlement in Venezuela in 1520, and the country -remained true to Spain until 1811. Ojeda was first -made governor of all the north coast of South -America, which soon took the name of the Spanish -Main. Pearls were found in the Gulf of Paria, and -the Spaniards at Santo Domingo rushed into South -America and treated the innocent natives with the -utmost cruelty. This brought on a fierce war lasting -over forty years. This was in the times of Charles -V, and he once sold the entire country to the Velsers -of Augsburg, who treated the poor natives even -worse than they had been treated by the Spaniards. -In the end, between the fighting and the earthquakes -which followed, the natives were either killed off or -driven into the interior. Then came another Castilian -knight, who in 1567 founded the city of Caracas, -so called after the Indians who used to live -there.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">[39]</span>“I have often read stories of the Spanish Main,” -said Mark. “They must have been bloody times.”</p> - -<p>“They were, for piracy and general lawlessness -were on every hand. The Spaniards ruled the people -with a rod of iron, and everything that the country -produced in the way of wealth went into the -pockets of the rulers. At last the natives could stand -it no longer, and a revolution took place, under the -leadership of Simon Bolivar, and a ten years’ war -followed, and the Spanish soldiery was forced to -leave the country.</p> - -<p>“At first Venezuela, with New Granada, (now -Colombia) and Ecuador formed the Republic of -Colombia. Simon Bolivar, often called the George -Washington of South America, was the President -of the Republic. At Bolivar’s death Venezuela became -independent, and has remained independent -ever since. Slavery was abolished there in 1854.”</p> - -<p>“They were ahead of us in that,” observed Frank.</p> - -<p>“So they were, and the credit is due to Jose Gregorio -Monagas, who suffered a martyr’s death in -consequence. The freeing of the slaves threw the -country into another revolution, and matters were -not settled until 1870, when Antonio Guzman Blanco<span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">[40]</span> -came into power and ruled until 1889. After this -followed another series of outbreaks, one political -leader trying to push another out of office, and this -has hurt trade a good deal. At present General -Castro is President of Venezuela, but there is no -telling how long his enemies will allow him to retain -that office.”</p> - -<p>“I hope we don’t get mixed up in any of their -revolutions,” said Sam.</p> - -<p>“I shouldn’t mind it,” put in Darry. “Anything -for excitement, you know.”</p> - -<p>“Venezuela has been divided into many different -states and territories at different times,” continued -Professor Strong. “In 1854 there were thirteen -provinces which were soon after increased to twenty-one. -In 1863 the Federalists conquered the Unionists, -and the provinces were re-named states and reduced -to seven. But this could not last, for fewer -states meant fewer office holders, so the number was -increased to twenty states, three territories and one -federal district. What the present government will -do toward making divisions there is no telling.”</p> - -<p>“I should think they would get tired of this continual -fighting,” said Darry.</p> - -<p>“The peons, or common people, do get very tired<span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">[41]</span> -of it, but they cannot stop the ambitions of the political -leaders, who have the entire soldiery under -their thumb. These leaders have seen so much of -fighting, and heard of so much fighting in their sister -republics, that it seems to get in their blood and they -can’t settle down for more than a few years at a -time. But as outsiders come in, with capital, and -develop the country, I think conditions will change, -and soon South America will be as stable as North -America or Europe.”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">[42]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER V<br /> - -<small>HOCKLEY MAKES A BOSOM FRIEND</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Now</span> I feel as if I knew a little more than I did -before,” observed Frank to Mark, after the professor’s -talk had come to an end and the teacher had -gone to put away his map. “It’s a pretty big country, -isn’t it?”</p> - -<p>“It is, Frank, and at the best I suppose we can -see only a small portion of it. But it would be -queer if we got mixed up in any of their fighting, -wouldn’t it?”</p> - -<p>“Do you really think we shall?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know. But just before we left New -York I saw a long article in one of the newspapers -about affairs in Venezuela, Colombia and on the -Isthmus. It seems that the Presidents of the two -Republics are unfriendly, and as a consequence the -President of Venezuela has given aid to the rebels in -Colombia, while the President of Colombia is doing -what he can to foment trouble in Venezuela. Besides -that Nicaragua and Ecuador are in the mix-up.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">[43]</span> -The papers said that fighting has been going on -in some places for years and that thousands of lives -have been lost, especially in the vicinity of the -Isthmus.”</p> - -<p>“It’s a wonder the professor didn’t speak of this.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I guess he didn’t want to scare us. Perhaps -the soldiery doesn’t interfere with foreigners, if, as -he says, the foreigners mind their own business.”</p> - -<p>The day was all that one could wish and the boys -enjoyed it fully, for the seasickness of the day before -had done each good. Mark and his chums -wondered how Hockley was faring, and at last Sam -went to the professor to inquire.</p> - -<p>“He is a very sick young man,” said Professor -Strong. “His over-eating has much to do with it. -But I hope to see him better in the morning.”</p> - -<p>“Do you think he would like to see any of us?” -asked Sam. “We’ll go willingly if you think best.”</p> - -<p>“No, he said he wished to see no one but myself, -Winthrop. You will do best to let him alone, and -when he comes out I wouldn’t say anything about -the affair,” concluded the professor.</p> - -<p>To while away the time the boys went over the -steamer from end to end, and an obliging under-officer -explained the engines, the steering gear and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_44">[44]</span> -other things of interest to them. So the time passed -swiftly enough until it was again the hour to retire.</p> - -<p>Hockley appeared about ten o’clock on the following -morning, thinner than ever and with big -rings under his eyes. He declined to eat any -breakfast and was content to sit by himself in a -corner on deck.</p> - -<p>“I suppose you fellows think I was seasick,” he -said, as Sam and Darry passed close to him. “But -if you do, you are mistaken. I ate something that -didn’t agree with me and that threw me into a regular -fit of biliousness. I get them every six months -or so, you know.”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t know,” returned Darry, who had -never seen Hockley sick in his life. “But I’m -glad you are over it,” he went on, kindly.</p> - -<p>“I suppose Frank and Mark are laughing in -their sleeves at me,” went on the lank youth, with -a scowl.</p> - -<p>“I don’t believe they are thinking of it,” answered -Sam. “We’ve been inspecting the ship -from top to bottom and stem to stern, and that has -kept us busy. You ought to go around, it’s really -very interesting.”</p> - -<p>“Pooh! I’ve been through ’em loads of times—on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">[45]</span> -the regular Atlantic liners,—twice as big as this,” -grumbled Hockley.</p> - -<p>A few words more followed, and Sam and Darry -passed on. “He’s all right again,” observed Darry. -“And his seasickness didn’t cure him of his bragging -either.”</p> - -<p>The steamer was now getting well down toward -the Mona Passage, and on the day following land -was sighted in the distance, a series of somewhat -barren rocks. A heavy wind was blowing.</p> - -<p>“Now we are going to pass through the monkey,” -said Darry, after a talk with the professor.</p> - -<p>“Pass through the monkey?” repeated Frank. -“Is this another of your little jokes, Darry?”</p> - -<p>“Not at all. Mona means monkey, so the professor -told me.”</p> - -<p>“Will we stop?”</p> - -<p>“No, we won’t go anywhere near land. The -next steamer stops, I believe, but not this one.”</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t mind spending some time in Porto -Rico and Cuba,” put in Mark. “There must have -been great excitement during the war with Spain.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps we’ll stop there on our way home,” -said Sam. “I should like to visit Havana.”</p> - -<p>The Mona Passage, or Strait, passed, the course<span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">[46]</span> -of the steamer was changed to the south-westward. -They were now in the Caribbean Sea, but the waters -looked very much as they had on the bosom of the -Atlantic. The wind increased until the blow promised -to be an unusually severe one.</p> - -<p>“My, but this wind is a corker!” ejaculated -Frank, as he and Mark tried in vain to walk the -open deck. “Perhaps we are going to have a hurricane.”</p> - -<p>“You boys had better come inside,” said Professor -Strong as he hurried up. “It’s not safe to -be here. A sudden lurch of the steamer might hurl -you overboard.”</p> - -<p>“All right, we’ll come in,” said Mark.</p> - -<p>He had scarcely spoken when an extra puff of -wind came along, banging the loose things in the -open cabin right and left. The wind took Frank’s -cap from his head and sent it spinning aft.</p> - -<p>“My cap!” cried the youth and started after it.</p> - -<p>“Be careful of yourself!” came from the professor, -but the fury of the wind drowned out his -voice completely.</p> - -<p>Bound to save his cap Frank followed it to the -rail. As he stooped to pick it up the steamer gave -a sudden roll to the opposite side and he was thrown<span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">[47]</span> -headlong. At the same moment the spray came -flying on board, nearly blinding him.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/p046.jpg" alt="" /></div> -<p class="caption">“Stay where you are!”</p> - -<p>“He’ll go overboard if he isn’t careful!” ejaculated -Mark, and ran after his chum.</p> - -<p>“You be careful yourself,” came from Professor -Strong, as he too rushed to the rescue.</p> - -<p>Before either could reach Frank the youth had -turned over and was trying to raise himself to his -feet. But now the steamer rolled once more and -in a flash Frank was thrown almost on top of the -rail. He caught the netting below with one hand -but his legs went over the side.</p> - -<p>“Oh!” burst out Mark, and could say no more, -for his heart was in his throat. He thought Frank -would be washed away in a moment more. The -spray still continued to fly all over the deck and at -times his chum could scarcely be seen.</p> - -<p>“Stay where you are,” called out Professor -Strong, to Mark. Then he turned and in a moment -more was at the rail and holding both Frank -and himself. Following the advice given, Mark -held fast to a nearby window.</p> - -<p>By this time a couple of deck hands were hurrying -to the scene, one with a long line. One end of -the line was fastened to the companionway rail and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">[48]</span> -the other run out to where the professor and Frank -remained. The boy was all out of breath and could -do but little toward helping himself. But Professor -Strong’s grip was a good one, and it did not -relax until one of the deck hands helped the lad to -a place along the rope. The deck hand went ahead -and the professor brought up the rear, with Frank -between them. In a moment more they were at the -companionway and Frank fairly tumbled below, -with the others following him.</p> - -<p>“Gracious, but that was a close shave!” panted -the boy, when able to speak. “I hadn’t any idea -the steamer would roll so much.”</p> - -<p>“After this when it blows heavily you must remain -in the cabin,” said Professor Strong, rather -severely. “And if your cap wants to go overboard—”</p> - -<p>“I’ll let it go,” finished Frank. “I won’t do -anything like that again for a train load of caps, -you can depend on that.”</p> - -<p>The storm increased, and by nightfall it was raining -heavily. The boys had expected a good deal of -thunder and lightning, but it did not come, and by -sunrise wind and rain were a thing of the past and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">[49]</span> -the steamer was pursuing her course as smoothly -as ever.</p> - -<p>On board the ship were half a dozen passengers -bound for Curaçao, including Herr Dombrich, the -merchant who occupied a portion of Professor -Strong’s stateroom. One of the number going -ashore at the little island was a man from Baltimore, -a fellow with Dutch blood in his veins, who had -formerly been in the saloon business, and who was -far from trustworthy. His name was Dan Markel, -and, strange as it may seem, he had formed a fairly -close acquaintanceship with Jake Hockley.</p> - -<p>“I wish I had the money you have,” said Dan -Markel to Hockley, one afternoon, as the two were -sitting alone near the bow of the steamer. “There -are lots of openings in Curaçao for a fellow with a -little capital. The Dutchmen down there don’t -know how to do business. With five hundred dollars -I could make ten thousand in less than a year.”</p> - -<p>“Haven’t you got five hundred dollars?” asked -Hockley, with interest.</p> - -<p>“Not now. I had a good deal more than that, -but I was burnt out, and there was a flaw in my insurance -papers, so I couldn’t get my money from the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">[50]</span> -company.” Dan Markel told the falsehood without -a blush.</p> - -<p>“But what do you expect to do in Curaçao without -money—strike some sort of job?”</p> - -<p>“I’ve got a rich friend, who has a plantation in -the interior. I think he will give me a place. But -I’d rather establish myself in the town. He wrote -to me that there was a good opening for a tobacco -shop. If I could get somebody to advance me five -hundred dollars I’d be willing to pay back a thousand -for it at the end of six months.”</p> - -<p>Now Hockley was carrying five hundred dollars -with him, which an indulgent father had given to -him for “extras,” as he expressed it, for Professor -Strong was to pay all regular bills. The money -was in gold, for gold is a standard no matter where -you travel. Hockley thought of this gold, and of -how he would like it to be a thousand instead of five -hundred dollars.</p> - -<p>“I’ve got five hundred dollars with me,” he said, -in his bragging way. “My father gave it to me -to have a good time on.”</p> - -<p>“Then you must be rich,” was the answer from -the man from Baltimore.</p> - -<p>“Dad’s a millionaire,” said Hockley, trying to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">[51]</span> -put on an air of superiority. “Made every cent -of it himself, too.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose you’ve got to pay your way with the -money.”</p> - -<p>“No, old Strong pays the bills.”</p> - -<p>“Then you’re in luck. I suppose you don’t want -to put that money out at a hundred per cent. interest,” -went on Dan Market, shrewdly. “It would -be as safe as in a bank, my word on it.”</p> - -<p>“I want to use the money, that’s the trouble. I -intend to have a good time in Venezuela.”</p> - -<p>“You ought to have it, on that money. I wish -I had your chance. Caracas is a dandy city for -sport, if you know the ropes.”</p> - -<p>“Then you have been there?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, four years ago,” answered Markel, and -this was another falsehood, for he had never been -near South America in his life. He had spent his -time in drifting from one city in the United States -to another, invariably leaving a trail of debts behind -him.</p> - -<p>“And you know the people?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, some of the very best of them. And I -can show you the best of the cock fighting and the -bull fighting, too, if you want to see them.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">[52]</span>“That’s what I want,” answered Hockley, his -eyes brightening. “No old slow poke of a trip for -me. I suppose Professor Strong expects to make -us toe the mark everywhere we go, but I don’t intend -to stand it. I came for a good time, and if I -can’t get it with the rest of the party I’m going to -go it on my own hook.”</p> - -<p>“To be sure—that’s just what I’d do.” Dan -Markel slapped Hockley on the back. “Hang me -if you ain’t a young man after my own heart. For -two pins I’d go down to Caracas with you, just to -show you around.”</p> - -<p>“I wish you would!” cried Hockley.</p> - -<p>“The trouble is while I can spare the time I can’t -spare the money. I’d take you up in a minute if it -wasn’t for that.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind the money—I’ll foot the bill,” answered -Hockley, never dreaming of how his offer -would result. “I’d like to have a companion who -had been around and who knew where the real -sport lay. You come with me, and you can return -to Curaçao after our crowd leaves Caracas.”</p> - -<p>A talk of half an hour followed. Markel pretended -to be unwilling to accept the generous offer -at first, but at length agreed to go with Hockley and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">[53]</span> -remain with him so long as the Strong party stopped -at Caracas. He was to show Hockley all the -“fancy sports” of the town and introduce him to a -number of swells and “high rollers.” On the -strength of the compact he borrowed fifty dollars -on the spot, giving his I. O. U. in exchange, a bit -of paper not worth the ink used in drawing it up.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">[54]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VI<br /> - -<small>A PLAN THAT FAILED</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Hockley</span> has found a new friend,” observed -Mark to Sam that afternoon. “A man a number -of years older than himself, too.”</p> - -<p>“So I’ve noticed, Mark. I must say I don’t -quite fancy the appearance of the stranger.”</p> - -<p>“Nor I. He looks rakish and dissipated. I -wonder where he is bound?”</p> - -<p>“I heard him speaking about getting off at Curaçao. -If that’s the case we won’t have him with us -after to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“Do we stop at the island to-morrow?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, we’ll be there before noon, so the professor -says.”</p> - -<p>Just then Darry appeared and joined them. He -had been in the cabin, and Hockley had introduced -Dan Markel to him.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Markel is a great talker, but I don’t take -stock in much he says,” said Darry. “Hockley<span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">[55]</span> -evidently thinks him just all right. He was going -to stop at Curaçao but has changed his mind and -is going right through to Caracas. He says he -knows Caracas like a book.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps he intends to take Hockley around,” -suggested Sam.</p> - -<p>“It was my impression we were all to go around -with the professor,” came from Mark.</p> - -<p>“That was the plan,” said Darry. “He’d have -a good deal of bother if he allowed everyone to run -off where he pleased. I don’t believe Hockley liked -it much because I didn’t seem to care for his new -friend.”</p> - -<p>“Let him think as he pleases—we haven’t got to -put ourselves out for his benefit,” said Mark; and -there the subject was dropped for the time being.</p> - -<p>In the meantime Frank had met Hockley and -Dan Markel coming out of the stateroom the latter -occupied. Markel had asked the lank youth to come -below and take a drink with him, and Hockley had -accepted, and a first drink had been followed by two -more, which put Hockley in rather an “elevated” -state of mind, even though he was used to drinking -moderately when at home.</p> - -<p>“My very best friend, Frank,” he called out.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">[56]</span> -“Mr. Dan Markel. Mr. Markel, this is one of our -party, Frank Newton, of New York city.”</p> - -<p>“Happy to know you,” responded Market, giving -Frank’s hand a warm shake. “It’s a real pleasure -to make friends on such a lonely trip as this.”</p> - -<p>“I haven’t found it particularly lonely,” said -Frank, stiffly. He was not favorably impressed by -the appearance of the man from Baltimore.</p> - -<p>“That’s because you have so many friends with -you, my boy. With me it was different. I didn’t -know a soul until Mr. Hockley and myself struck -up an acquaintanceship.”</p> - -<p>“But now it’s all right, eh?” put in Hockley, -gripping Markel’s shoulder in a brotherly way.</p> - -<p>“To be sure it’s all right,” was the quick answer. -“We’ll stick together and have a good time. Perhaps -young Newton will join us?”</p> - -<p>“Thank you, but I shall stick to my chums,” answered -Frank, coolly, and walked off, leaving Markel -staring after him.</p> - -<p>“The little beggar!” muttered Hockley, when -Frank was out of hearing. “I’d like to wring his -neck for him.”</p> - -<p>“Why, what’s the trouble?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, nothing in particular, but somehow he and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">[57]</span> -the rest of the crowd seem to be down on me, and -they are making it as unpleasant as they can at every -opportunity.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t say! It’s a wonder Professor Strong -permits it.”</p> - -<p>“They take good care to be decent when he’s -around, and of course I’m no tale bearer, to go to -him. But I would like to fix young Newton.”</p> - -<p>“Is he worse than the others?”</p> - -<p>“Sometimes I think he is. Anyway, if I got -square on him it might teach the others a lesson.”</p> - -<p>Frank joined his chums and told what had taken -place. At the next meal Markel was introduced to -the others, but all ignored him, and even Professor -Strong showed that he did not like the idea of -Hockley picking up such an acquaintance.</p> - -<p>The fact that he had been snubbed made Dan -Markel angry, and feeling that Hockley was now -his friend and would back him up, he let out a stream -of abuse, in the privacy of his stateroom, with the -lank youth taking it in and nodding vigorously.</p> - -<p>“You are right, that little cub is the worst,” said -Markel, referring to Frank. “He needs taming -down. I wish I had him under my care for a week -or two, I’d show him how to behave.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">[58]</span>“I’ve been thinking of an idea,” retorted Hockley, -slowly. “It would be a grand scheme if we -could put it through.”</p> - -<p>“What is it?”</p> - -<p>“We are going to land at Curaçao to-morrow. -I wish I could arrange it so one of the other fellows -would be left behind to paddle his own canoe. It -would take some of the importance out of him.”</p> - -<p>“Well, that might be arranged,” returned Markel, -rubbing his chin reflectively. “Perhaps we -might fix it so that all of them were left there -stranded.”</p> - -<p>“How long will the steamer stay there?”</p> - -<p>“Six hours, so I heard the captain tell one of the -other passengers.”</p> - -<p>“The trouble is we’ll all have to go ashore with -the professor, if they let us go ashore at all.”</p> - -<p>“Well, we’ll try to think up some scheme,” said -the man from Baltimore; and then the subject was -changed.</p> - -<p>Curaçao is the largest and most important of the -Dutch West Indian Islands, with a population of -about 25,000 souls. The island is largely of a phosphate -nature, and the government derives a handsome<span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">[59]</span> -income from the sale of this product. To the -east of Curaçao is Bonaire, another Dutch possession, -and to the west Aruba, all of which are likely -to become a part of United States territory in the -near future. The islands are of considerable importance, -and trade not alone in phosphate of lime -but also in salt, beans, dyewoods and fruits.</p> - -<p>Early in the morning the dim outlines of Curaçao -could be seen and about ten o’clock the steamer -glided into the bay of St. Anna, upon which Willemstad, -the capital city is located. The harbor is -a commodious one, and ships displaying the flags -of many nations were on every hand.</p> - -<p>“What a pretty town!” exclaimed Mark, as he -surveyed the distant shore with a glass. “I declare -it looks like some of these old Dutch paintings.”</p> - -<p>“This island is famous in history,” said Professor -Strong, who stood by. “It was discovered -by the Spaniards in 1527. About a hundred years -after that the Dutch took it and held it for nearly -two hundred years. Then the English came over -and wrested it from the Dutch, but had to give it -back eight years later, in 1815. The pirates and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">[60]</span> -buccaneers used to find these islands excellent stopping -places, and many a political refugee has ended -his days on them.”</p> - -<p>“Is the capital very large?”</p> - -<p>“About fifteen thousand inhabitants.”</p> - -<p>“How about going ashore and taking a look -around?” questioned Darry. “I’d like first rate to -stretch my legs on land once more.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes, do let us go ashore?” pleaded Frank. -“The steamer is going to stay five or six hours, and -that will give us loads of time for looking around.”</p> - -<p>“I will see what can be done when we anchor,” -said the professor. “They may be very strict here—I -do not know.”</p> - -<p>Soon the big steamer was close up to the wharf -where she was to discharge part of her cargo and -passengers. One of the first parties to leave was -Herr Dombrich, who shook hands cordially with the -professor.</p> - -<p>“It has been von great bleasure to sail mit you,” -said the Dutch merchant. “I vos hobe ve meet -again, not so?”</p> - -<p>“I’m thinking of taking the boys ashore,” said -the professor. “They would like to see the city.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">[61]</span>“Yes, yes, surely you must do dot,” was the reply. -“I vould go mit you, but I must on pisiness go to de -udder side of de island. Goot py!” and in a moment -Herr Dombrich was ashore and lost in a -crowd. Then Mark caught a glimpse of him as he -was driven away in an old-fashioned Dutch carriage -which had been waiting for him.</p> - -<p>An interview was had with some custom house -and other officials, and the party obtained permission -to go ashore and roam around the place until -the steamer should set sail for La Guayra. In the -meantime Dan Markel had already disappeared up -one of the long docks.</p> - -<p>The man from Baltimore was in a quandary. He -had borrowed fifty dollars from Hockley, and he -was strongly inclined to hide until the steamer -should sail and then use the money to suit himself. -But he realized that his capital, which now represented -a total of eighty dollars, would not last forever, -and a brief look around Willemstad convinced -him that it was not at all the city he had anticipated.</p> - -<p>“I’d starve to death here, after the money was -gone,” he reasoned. “I’ll wager these Dutchmen -are regular misers. The best thing I can do is to go<span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">[62]</span> -to Caracas with that crowd and then squeeze that -young fool out of another fifty, or maybe a couple -of hundred.”</p> - -<p>He had come ashore after another talk with -Hockley, in which he had promised to lay some -plan whereby one or another of the boys might be -left behind. He had been told by the captain of the -steamer that the vessel would sail at five o’clock -sharp. If he could only manage to keep somebody -ashore until ten or fifteen minutes after that hour -the deed would be done.</p> - -<p>The day was hot and, as was usual with him, -Markel was dry, and he entered the first wine shop -he discovered. Here he imbibed freely, with the -consequence that when he arose to go his mind was -far from being as free as it had been.</p> - -<p>“I guess I’ll go and see a little more of the town -on my own hook before I try to make any arrangements,” -he muttered to himself, and strolled on until -another drinking place presented itself. Here he -met another American, and the pair threw dice for -drinks for over an hour. Then the man from Baltimore -dozed off in a chair, and did not awaken -until a number of hours later.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">[63]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VII<br /> - -<small>FROM CURAÇAO TO LA GUAYRA</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">Leaving</span> the steamer, our friends proceeded to -the main thoroughfare of Willemstad, a quaint old -street, scrupulously clean—a characteristic of every -Dutch town—and with buildings that looked as if -they had been moved over from Amsterdam. Not -far off was the home of the governor of the island, -a mansion with walls of immense thickness. The -place fronted the bay and near by was something of -a fortress with a few ancient cannon. Here a number -of Dutch soldiers were on duty.</p> - -<p>“I will see if I cannot get carriages, and then we -can drive around,” said Professor Strong, and this -was done, and soon they were moving along slowly, -for no Dutch hackman ever thinks of driving fast. -Besides it was now the noon hour, and the hackmen -would rather have taken their midday nap than earn -a couple of dollars. The boys soon discovered that -in the tropics to do anything, or to have anything -done for you, between the hours of eleven to three<span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">[64]</span> -is extremely difficult. Merchants close their places -of business and everybody smokes and dreams or -goes to sleep.</p> - -<p>“I see a lot of negroes,” observed Mark, as they -moved along.</p> - -<p>“The population is mostly of colored blood,” answered -the professor. “The colored people are all -free, yet the few Dutchmen that are here are virtually -their masters. The negroes work in the phosphate -mines, and their task is harder than that of a -Pennsylvania coal miner ten times over. If we had -time we might visit one of the phosphate works, but -I hate to risk it.”</p> - -<p>“For such a small place there are lots of ships -here,” put in Sam.</p> - -<p>“That is true and I think the reason is because -this is a free port of entry. The ships bring in all -sorts of things, and some say a good deal of the -stuff is afterwards smuggled into Venezuela and -Colombia.”</p> - -<p>They drove on, past the quaint shops and other -buildings, but in an opposite direction to that taken -by Dan Markel. During the drive Hockley had -little or nothing to say. He was worried over the -non-appearance of the man from Baltimore, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">[65]</span> -looked for him eagerly at every corner and cross -road.</p> - -<p>“He’s made a mess of it,” he thought. “We’ll -be driving back soon and that will be the end of it.” -And then he thought of the fifty dollars and began -to suspect Markel, and something like a chill passed -over him.</p> - -<p>“If he cheated me I’ll fix him, see if I don’t!” he -told himself. Yet he felt that he was helpless and -could do nothing, for the loan had been a fair one.</p> - -<p>“There is a curious story connected with the -Island of Curaçao,” said the professor, as they -passed along through the suburbs of the capital. -“It is said that in years gone by some of the old -Spanish pirates filled a cave in the interior with gold -and then sprinkled a trail of salt from the cave to -the sea. Some time after that the pirates were captured -and all made to walk the plank. One of them, -in an endeavor to save his life, told of the treasure -and of the trail that had been left. Those who had -captured the pirates immediately sailed for the -island, but before they could reach here a fearful -hurricane came up, washing the land from end to -end and entirely destroying the trail of salt, so that -the treasure has not been unearthed to this day.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">[66]</span>For the greater part the road was hard, dusty and -unshaded. But in spots were beautiful groves of -plantains and oranges, while cocoanut palms were -by no means lacking. The houses everywhere were -low, broad, and with walls of great thickness, and in -between them were scattered the huts of the poorer -class, built of palm thatch and often covered with -vines.</p> - -<p>On the return they passed an old Dutch saw-mill, -where a stout Dutchman was directing the labors of -a dozen coal-black natives. The natives droned a -tune as they moved the heavy logs into the mill. -They appeared to be only half awake, and the master -threatened them continually in an endeavor to -make them move faster.</p> - -<p>“They are not killing themselves with work,” -observed Sam.</p> - -<p>“They never work as fast in the tropics as they -do in the temperate zone of our own country,” answered -Professor Strong. “The heat is against it. -Even the most active of men are apt to become easy-going -after they have been here a number of years.”</p> - -<p>The drive took longer than anticipated and when -they again reached the docks the steamer was ready -to sail. They were soon on board, and a little later<span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">[67]</span> -St. Anna harbor was left behind and the journey -to Venezuela was resumed.</p> - -<p>“What’s up?” asked Mark, of Hockley, when he -saw the lank youth walking through the cabins looking -in one direction and another. “Lost anything?”</p> - -<p>“No,” was the curt answer, and then with a -peculiar look in his eyes, Hockley continued: -“Have you seen anything of Mr. Markel since we -came on board?”</p> - -<p>“I have not. He got off at Willemstad.”</p> - -<p>“I know it. But he was going through to La -Guayra and Caracas.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I haven’t seen him,” answered Mark, -and moved on.</p> - -<p>Hockley continued his search for over an hour -and then went to the purser, and from that individual -learned that Markel had taken no stateroom -for the coming night nor had he paid passage -money to be carried to La Guayra.</p> - -<p>“That settles it,” muttered Hockley to himself, -as he walked off. “He has given me the slip and I -am out my fifty dollars. What a fool I was to -trust him! And I thought he was such a fine fellow!” -And he gripped his fists in useless rage.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">[68]</span> -He fancied that he had seen the last of the man from -Baltimore, but he was mistaken.</p> - -<p>That night the boys went to bed full of expectations -for the morrow, for the run from Curaçao to -La Guayra, the nearest seaport to Caracas, is but a -short one.</p> - -<p>“My, but it’s getting hot!” observed Frank, -while undressing. “It’s more than I bargained -for.”</p> - -<p>“You must remember we are only twelve degrees -north of the equator,” answered Mark. “Wait -till we strike the Orinoco, then I guess you’ll do -some sweating. That stream is only about seven -or eight degrees above the line.”</p> - -<p>Nevertheless the boys passed a fairly comfortable -night and did not arise until it was time for breakfast. -Then they went on deck to watch for the -first sight of land.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah! There’s land!” was Darry’s cry, some -hours later. He held a glass in his hand. “My, -what a mountain!”</p> - -<p>One after another looked through the glass, and -at a great distance made out a gigantic cliff overhanging -the sea. As the steamer came closer they -made out the wall more plainly, and saw the lazy<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">[69]</span> -clouds drifting by its top and between its clefts. -At the foot of the gigantic cliff was a narrow patch -of sand with here and there a few tropical trees and -bushes. Upon the sand the breakers rushed with a -low, booming sound, and in spots they covered the -rocks with a milklike foam.</p> - -<p>“I don’t see anything of a town,” said Frank.</p> - -<p>“We have got to round yonder point before you -can see it,” answered an under-officer standing near. -“It’s not much of a place, and it’s tucked away -right under the mountain.”</p> - -<p>An hour later they rounded the point that had -been mentioned and at a distance made out La -Guayra, which is located on a narrow strip of land -between the great cliff and the sea. They could -see but little outside of several long and narrow -streets running parallel with the mountain. At one -end of the town was a small hill, with several -long, low government buildings and a church or -two.</p> - -<p>“When I was here before, one had to be taken -ashore in a small boat,” said Professor Strong. -“The ocean ran with great swiftness along the -beach. But now they have a breakwater and some -first-class docks and there is little trouble.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">[70]</span>“The town seems to be hemmed in,” said Sam. -“How do they get anywhere excepting by boat?”</p> - -<p>“There is a road over the mountain and a railroad -track, too. But it’s up-hill climbing from beginning -to end.”</p> - -<p>“What’s that thing on yonder hillside?” asked -Mark, pointing to a somewhat dilapidated building, -one side of which was set up on long sticks.</p> - -<p>“That is the old bull fighting ring. In days gone -by they used to have very fierce fights there and -much money used to be wagered on the contests. -But the folks are beginning to become civilized now -and the bull fighting doesn’t amount to much.”</p> - -<p>As soon as the passengers had landed from the -steamer they found themselves in the hands of the -custom-house officials, who proceeded to collect all -they thought was due. In the meantime, while the -professor was busy paying the duties, Mark and -the others strolled through the little park fronting -the pier.</p> - -<p>“This isn’t so bad,” said Frank, as he gazed at -the fountain and the heroic statue of General -Guzman Blanco. “Wonder what that big building -behind us is.”</p> - -<p>It proved to be the custom house, an ancient<span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">[71]</span> -building looking for all the world like a fort. There -was a heavy wall, with an arched gateway and a -great staircase leading to the rooms in the upper -part of the building. The walls were of huge stones -and were five to six feet in thickness.</p> - -<p>“Whoever built this, built it to last,” said Sam. -“I don’t think anything less than an earthquake -could bring it down.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose they have used it for a fort for years,” -said Darry, and he hit the truth exactly. “When -there is a rebellion in a country the custom house is -always more or less of a point of interest.”</p> - -<p>They were soon joined by Professor Strong, who -conducted them to a modest looking hotel not many -squares away.</p> - -<p>“We will remain here over night and take the -train for Caracas in the morning,” said the professor. -“I want you to see what a triumph of engineering -skill this road is, and you can’t see that -in the darkness.”</p> - -<p>“Phew! what a smell!” came from Hockley, as -he turned up his nose. “La Guayra isn’t very -clean.”</p> - -<p>“You are right, Hockley, although the town is -much better than it used to be. When I was here<span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">[72]</span> -years ago the streets were literally covered with -filth and there was a good deal of sickness. You -see, it is really nothing but a seaport. Only those -who have to work here will stay.”</p> - -<p>Their rooms were not of the best, and during the -night Frank got up several times, declaring that -his bed was inhabited. All were outside by dawn -and saw the sun rise over the rolling sea. Then a -breakfast of rolls, coffee and fish was had and they -proceeded to the railroad station—to take the most -exciting railroad ride that they had ever experienced.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">[73]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VIII<br /> - -<small>ON A CLIFF AND UNDER</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Hurrah</span> for a railroad ride over the mountains!” -cried Darry, as they proceeded to the station. -“Wonder how long it will be?”</p> - -<p>“Twenty-four miles, so the professor said,” responded -Sam. “He said Caracas is only six miles -away and the mule path isn’t over nine miles long. -But the lowest part of the mountain is nearly a mile -high and the train has to do a lot of twisted traveling -to get over it.”</p> - -<p>“Wonder they wouldn’t tunnel the mountain,” -suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>“That’s what they are talking of doing,” put in -Hockley, who felt just then like being sociable. -“Somebody has got a franchise, but it’s going to -take millions of dollars.”</p> - -<p>The professor had been looking after tickets. He -soon returned and when the train came along they -all got in the first-class compartment, which was not<span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">[74]</span> -much better than a very ordinary car at home. The -car sat so close to the rails that the tops of the -wheels had to be bridged over, interfering somewhat -with the seating capacity.</p> - -<p>Soon came a long whistle, the conductor waved -his hand and the train moved away, through the -town and in full view of the ocean. The speed -was fair, but nothing to what the boys were used to -at home, yet this was not to be wondered at, for -they were climbing steadily along the face of the -mountain. Up and up they went until Frank, who -sat at a window overlooking the water hundreds -of feet below, could not help but shudder.</p> - -<p>“If we should drop off here, there wouldn’t be -anything left of us,” he said to Sam.</p> - -<p>“I guess we won’t drop off,” was the reply. -“But say, it does make a fellow dizzy to look down, -doesn’t it?”</p> - -<p>The professor sat with them and pointed out several -places of interest as they sped onward. “You -see the tracks follow the mule road in many places. -The path is about nine miles long and in former -days it was the only means of communication between -Caracas and the sea, outside of an old Indian -trail further to our right.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">[75]</span>They soon dashed into a tunnel and out again, -and then began another climb along the mountain -side. As they reached a higher elevation they noticed -that the air was cooler.</p> - -<p>“We are coming to another tunnel,” said Mark, -as they swung around a sharp curve.</p> - -<p>“Yes, and we’re running swifter than before,” -put in Sam.</p> - -<p>The next instant found them in the tunnel, rushing -past great masses of black rocks. Nothing but -smoky lamps lit up the car and Mark was gazing -at one of these, when of a sudden the train came to -such a short stop that everybody was pitched forward.</p> - -<p>“We’ve struck something,” cried Darry, as he -scrambled up from the floor, to which he had been -hurled.</p> - -<p>“Is anybody hurt?” came anxiously from Professor -Strong, as soon as the shock was over and -the car came to a standstill.</p> - -<p>“I pinched my hand on the seat,” answered -Mark. “But it doesn’t amount to anything.”</p> - -<p>The passengers were climbing out of the train, -to learn the cause of the sudden stoppage. They -found the train hands gathering about the engine<span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">[76]</span> -and with them was a track-walker who had given -them the signal to stop.</p> - -<p>“There has been a cave-in ahead, he says,” said -Professor Strong, after listening to the track-walker. -“If the train hadn’t stopped we might all -have been killed.”</p> - -<p>The track-walker talked excitedly, in Spanish and -in broken English, and some of the party went -ahead to inspect the cave-in. A large mass of rocks -had fallen and it was easy to see that the track -would not be cleared for several hours.</p> - -<p>“Now what’s to do?” grumbled Hockley. “I’m -sure I don’t want to stay boxed up in this tunnel till -they clear that stuff away.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t see what else we can do,” answered Sam, -“unless we walk all the way back to La Guayra.”</p> - -<p>“How far are we from Caracas?” asked Mark, -of one of the passengers.</p> - -<p>“About three miles,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>“Can’t we walk to that place?” asked Mark, of -Professor Strong. “We have nothing but our little -shoulder valises to carry.”</p> - -<p>“I think we can walk it,” said the professor. “I -will ask how the track ahead is.”</p> - -<p>He did so and was informed that, so far as the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">[77]</span> -track-walker knew, it was all clear. Accordingly -they started out, the professor and Mark leading -the way and the others following close behind.</p> - -<p>They were in the shadow of the mountain so that -the fierce rays of the sun did not reach them. They -had left the tallest portion of the mountain behind, -so the way was now all more or less down grade.</p> - -<p>“I move we get off the railroad track and rest,” -said Hockley, after half a mile had been covered. -“We’re in no especial hurry to get to Caracas.”</p> - -<p>The professor and the others were willing, and -leaving the track they found shelter along a hillside -covered with tropical trees and bushes. As they -stepped away from the railroad they heard a humming -sound and saw a handcar approaching, filled -with men and tools, bound for the scene of the -cave-in.</p> - -<p>“They must have telegraphed for those fellows,” -said Darry. “They will get the road into shape -again in short order.”</p> - -<p>It was very pleasant to lie under the trees in the -shade, and Frank was so sleepy that he soon dropped -into a doze. Mark walked around inspecting the -surroundings, and to get a better outlook climbed a -small cliff which arose not far away.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">[78]</span>From the elevation of the cliff Mark could get a -good view of the valley stretching out in the direction -of Caracas and could even see some of the white -buildings in the distance. Then the youth walked -along the cliff to where there was a turn, around a -series of rough rocks.</p> - -<p>There had been a heavy dew on the mountain the -night before and in the shady spots this had not yet -dried off. As he made the turn his foot trod in -some moisture and slipped, and down he went on -his knee. He tried to save himself by clutching at -some vines but these gave way and over the cliff -he plunged on to some loose rocks below.</p> - -<p>Fortunately for Mark, the fall was not a deep -one or some bones might have been broken. The -loose stones and earth gave way beneath his weight -and allowed him to slide swiftly under the cliff into -a long and narrow hollow. Here he went with a -splash into some water up to his knees and some of -the dirt and stones came after him, sending the -moisture all over him.</p> - -<p>Mark was so surprised at the turn of affairs that -for the moment he stood perfectly still, panting for -breath. It was dark around him, the only light<span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">[79]</span> -coming from the opening above, which was fully -a dozen feet over his head. In front of him was the -rocky cliff raising itself in a curve over his head. -Behind him was the wall of dirt. The split, if such -it may be called, extended a dozen feet in one direction -and out of sight in the other.</p> - -<p>“Now I’m in a pickle and no mistake,” he muttered, -dismally. “How in the world am I going to -get out of this hole?”</p> - -<p>The question could not be answered at once and -Mark waited until he had got back some of his -breath. Then he started to move off in the direction -in which the split led.</p> - -<p>He soon found that he was on an uncertain footing, -for he had progressed less than a dozen feet -when he began to sink into the pasty ooze of which -the bottom of the opening was composed. The -water was above his knees here and growing deeper.</p> - -<p>“No use trying in that direction,” he told himself. -“If there was an opening the water wouldn’t -stand there like that. It’s a regular pocket and if -I’m not careful I’ll plaster myself so fast that I’ll -never get out.”</p> - -<p>He thought to cry for help but then realized that<span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">[80]</span> -his friends were a good distance off and that even -if they heard him they would not know exactly how -to reach the opening.</p> - -<p>“I must help myself,” he murmured. “Surely I -ought to be able to climb that wall of dirt somehow. -Wonder if my pocketknife won’t help me?”</p> - -<p>He brought forth the knife and dug the blade into -the soil among the stones. But it would not hold -and merely brought down more of the wall at his -feet. Then, without warning a big mass of dirt -came down, hurling him to the bottom of the pocket -and covering him completely.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/p081.jpg" alt="" /></div> -<p class="caption">A big mass of dirt came down.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">[81]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IX<br /> - -<small>HOCKLEY SHOWS HIS TRUE COLORS</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">Professor Strong</span> had been studying a guide -book which he carried. Presently he closed the -volume, put it into his pocket, and leaped to his feet.</p> - -<p>“Come, boys, I think we had better be on our -way.”</p> - -<p>“I’m ready,” answered Darry, and aroused -Frank.</p> - -<p>Hockley was close at hand, throwing stones at -some birds in a neighboring tree. Now he stopped -and walked over to the railroad track.</p> - -<p>“Where is Mark?”</p> - -<p>Several asked the question at the same time, and -all looked around for their companion.</p> - -<p>“I saw him walking towards yonder cliff last,” -said Sam. “But that was some time ago.”</p> - -<p>“Hullo, Mark!” cried Frank. “Where are -you?”</p> - -<p>No answer came back, and the cry was repeated -by Darry and Sam. Then the professor shouted,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">[82]</span> -with all the strength of his lungs. Still there was -no reply.</p> - -<p>“This is very strange,” observed the professor, -with a serious look on his face. “I trust he hasn’t -gotten into any trouble. You are sure you saw -him going toward the cliff, Winthrop?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir, directly after Frank went to sleep.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll go over and take a look around.”</p> - -<p>“Let me go with you, please,” said Frank, and -he followed and so did Sam and Darry. Hockley -sat down on the railroad embankment to await their -return.</p> - -<p>Sam pointed out the spot where he had last seen -Mark and it did not take the crowd long to reach -that vicinity. All looked around anxiously.</p> - -<p>“He isn’t here, that’s sure,” said Professor -Strong. “It’s a mystery what became of him.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps he fell over into the bushes below,” -suggested Darry.</p> - -<p>At this Frank, who loved Mark as a brother, -gave a shiver and crawled to the edge. But there -was nothing below but dirt and tropical vines, the -latter overrun with big spiders.</p> - -<p>“Mark! Mark!” he shouted, and again the -others joined in the cry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">[83]</span>“Hark! I heard something!” exclaimed Sam, -who had walked nearest to the rough rocks where -Mark had first slipped. “Listen.”</p> - -<p>All did so, with bated breath. A low groan -reached their ears, sounding as if it had come from -the bowels of the earth.</p> - -<p>“It’s Mark! He’s surely had a fall!” gasped -Frank. He raised his voice: “Mark! Mark! -Where are you?”</p> - -<p>“Here, under the cliff,” was the faint answer, -and another groan followed.</p> - -<p>“Under the cliff?” repeated Professor Strong. -He crawled to the edge and looked around as Frank -had done. “I see no opening, do you?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir.”</p> - -<p>“The cries come from further up the cliff, in that -direction,” said Sam, whose ears seemed to be more -acute than the rest. “Listen! I think he must be -in some hole over yonder.”</p> - -<p>The professor hurried toward the rough rocks -and was soon climbing around them. But he was -more careful than Mark had been and made the turn -in safety. He now found himself on another portion -of the cliff and Mark’s groans came from directly -beneath him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">[84]</span>“Mark!” he called out. “Are you below -there?”</p> - -<p>“I am,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>“Are you much hurt?”</p> - -<p>“My ankle got a bad twist and I was almost -smothered by some dirt covering me.”</p> - -<p>The professor said no more just then but tried -to look over the edge of the cliff into the hollow. -In this, however, he was unsuccessful.</p> - -<p>But Professor Strong was not a man to be -daunted easily. When out on hunting expeditions -he had at various times, gotten into positions of -extreme peril, and he was used to taking risks. -Measuring the distance to the dirt hill in front of the -cliff, he took a leap and landed in safety. He was -careful not to go too close to the hole so there was -no caving-in as there had been when Mark descended.</p> - -<p>“Now, then, I’ll see if I can help you out,” said -the professor, when he caught sight of the youth -resting on top of the dirt that had last fallen.</p> - -<p>“Be careful, or you’ll slide down, too,” answered -Mark. “That bank is awfully treacherous.”</p> - -<p>Leaving the vicinity of the opening Professor<span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">[85]</span> -Strong began to hunt for something by which Mark -might be hauled up. But nothing was at hand.</p> - -<p>“Have you found him?” came from Frank.</p> - -<p>“Yes. He is at the bottom of a deep opening. -I will have to haul him out if I can find anything -to do it with.”</p> - -<p>“If only we had a rope,” came from Darry.</p> - -<p>Each looked around in perplexity.</p> - -<p>“Might try some of the vines by twisting them -together,” suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>“The vines growing around here are not strong -enough,” called back the professor.</p> - -<p>At that moment came a slight rumble from the -railroad and at a distance another handcar hove -into sight, containing several laborers with their -tools.</p> - -<p>“Hi! stop that handcar!” called out Frank to -Hockley, who had arisen to watch the car pass.</p> - -<p>“What for?” demanded the lank youth.</p> - -<p>“The professor wants a rope.”</p> - -<p>“Stop the car yourself,” muttered Hockley. -Nevertheless, when the car came near, he waved his -hand for the men to stop working the handles which -kept it in motion.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">[86]</span>“What do you want?” asked one of the men, -in a Spanish patois, after the handcar had been -brought to a standstill.</p> - -<p>“We want a rope,” said Hockley, without understanding -the man.</p> - -<p>The man shrugged his shoulders and so did his -companions. Then Hockley pointed to a rope which -laid coiled up on the car. At this the native smiled, -then looked perplexed.</p> - -<p>By this time Professor Strong was hurrying in -the direction. He could speak the language fairly -well and soon made them understand that somebody -was in a hole and had to be hauled out. Then he -held a silver piece out and the native, who was a -sort of foreman, took it instantly. The handcar was -taken from the tracks and all the workmen followed -the professor to the hill in front of the cliff.</p> - -<p>When Mark was brought up and placed on the -grass, it was found that his ankle was so swollen -that walking was out of the question. He was wet -and dirty from head to foot and the others did what -they could toward cleaning him off. The handcar -men could not remain and hurried away as soon as -they could get back their rope.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know what you’re going to do with me,”<span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">[87]</span> -said Mark, ruefully. “I’d walk if I could but I -can’t and that’s all there is to it.”</p> - -<p>“Does the ankle still hurt when you are resting?” -asked the professor kindly.</p> - -<p>“No, only when I try to stand on it.”</p> - -<p>“Then rest where you are and I will see what -can be done toward getting a horse or some other -animal to carry you.”</p> - -<p>Professor Strong started off toward the mountain -road between La Guayra and Caracas, and the -others gathered about Mark, bathing his ankle with -water from a nearby pool and doing all they could -otherwise to make him comfortable.</p> - -<p>“It was a foolish thing to do, attempting to -crawl around that cliff,” observed Hockley, as he -sat by watching proceedings, without offering any -aid. “You’ve got us all into a muss. Goodness -only knows when we’ll get to Caracas now.”</p> - -<p>“You needn’t wait for us if you don’t wish to,” -retorted Frank, stung by the lank youth’s harshness. -“You can go ahead—I’m sure we shan’t miss you.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t you talk to me like that, Frank Newton. -I won’t stand it!” blurted out Hockley, his face reddening.</p> - -<p>“I just will talk to you like that, Jake Hockley.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">[88]</span> -Mark didn’t get his ankle sprained for fun, and -you know it.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, let him alone, Frank,” put in Mark. “It -isn’t worth quarreling about.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose you fellows will be getting into -trouble right straight along,” continued Hockley, -who seemed to have one of his streaks of ill temper. -“I shan’t put up with it, I’ll tell you that.”</p> - -<p>“You’ll get into trouble in another minute, if -you don’t quit,” cried Frank. “The best thing you -can do is to go on to Caracas and leave us alone.”</p> - -<p>“That’s all you fellows want—to get clear of -me,” growled the lank youth. “But you can’t do it. -My father’s paying my way, and I’m going to do as -I please, and I’m not going to allow Professor Strong -to consult you and not me in everything either,” he -went on, bitterly.</p> - -<p>As he finished speaking he started to move from -one side of the little crowd to the other. He passed -close to Mark and as he did so his foot hit the -swollen ankle and made the youth on the ground -cry out with pain.</p> - -<p>“Oh, Hockley, what did you do that for?”</p> - -<p>“I—er—I didn’t mean to do it,” answered the -lank youth, surlily.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">[89]</span>“You did mean to do it, you mean bully!” ejaculated -Frank, who had seen the movement perfectly. -And in a sudden rage he ran up and shoved Hockley -backward into some brushwood. “If you try it -again, I’ll fight you, small as I am.”</p> - -<p>It took the lank youth a few seconds to recover -and then his face was redder than ever. Without a -word he darted for Frank and struck him heavily -in the shoulder. Then he struck out again, but -Frank dodged the blow. A moment more and the -two had clinched and were rolling over and over on -the ground.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">[90]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER X<br /> - -<small>ON MULE BACK INTO CARACAS</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">A fight</span>! A fight!” came from Sam.</p> - -<p>“Give it to him, Frank, don’t let him get the best -of you,” put in Darry.</p> - -<p>“Stop them,” ordered Mark, trying to rise and -then falling back with a groan of pain. “Stop them, -I say. Glummy is too big for Frank.”</p> - -<p>“You let us alone,” growled the bully. “This -is our fight and we’ll settle it between us. He struck -me first.”</p> - -<p>While he was talking he was doing his best to -get on top of Frank. But the latter, though small, -proved that he was powerful and Hockley held him -down with difficulty. The lank youth now hit out -again and Frank was struck in the nose and the -blood began to flow from that organ.</p> - -<p>“Let me up!” came from the smaller youth. And -then he too struck out, landing on Hockley’s chin. -Then he jerked the lank youth by the arm and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">[91]</span> -Hockley rolled over on the grass, and in a moment -Frank was on top.</p> - -<p>“Get off!” howled the bully, in a terrible rage -over being thus brought to earth. “Get off, or I’ll -hammer the life out of you!”</p> - -<p>“You’ve got to spell able first,” retorted Frank -and struck him in the cheek. “There’s one for -stepping on Mark’s ankle and there’s another to -teach you manners.” He struck out heavily. Then -Hockley pulled him over and they laid side by side -panting and striking and each endeavoring to rise.</p> - -<p>Suddenly Frank saw his chance and struck the -bully directly in the mouth. The blow was delivered -with all the force possible and it loosened one of -Hockley’s teeth and made it bleed.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah! Good for Frank!” cried Sam. “That’s -the sort.”</p> - -<p>“Hi! hi! what does this mean, boys?” The call -came from the brushwood close at hand. “Stop -that fighting instantly!”</p> - -<p>The voice was that of Professor Strong, and both -Frank and Hockley lost no time in leaping to their -feet. They stepped apart and it must be confessed -that Frank looked at the instructor rather shamefacedly. -Hockley was defiant.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">[92]</span>“What have you boys been fighting about?” demanded -Professor Strong, as he came up and gazed -at one and the other sternly.</p> - -<p>“Newton started it,” answered Hockley. “He -tackled me without any reason for it.”</p> - -<p>“That isn’t true,” cried Frank. “He kicked -Mark’s sore ankle and that made me mad, and I -told him what a brute he was, and shoved him back -out of the way. Then he struck me in the shoulder.”</p> - -<p>“It isn’t so, he hit me first,” said Hockley, surlily.</p> - -<p>“What Frank says is true,” put in Darry. “He -did kick Mark’s lame ankle, and that was a shame.”</p> - -<p>“How about this?” questioned the professor, of -Mark.</p> - -<p>“He struck my ankle when he was walking past, -sir. He said it was an accident, but——”</p> - -<p>“It wasn’t,” broke in Frank. “I saw him do it -on purpose.”</p> - -<p>“Hockley’s been aching for a quarrel ever since -he started,” came from Sam.</p> - -<p>“The whole crowd is down on me,” growled the -lank youth. “They want to run things to suit themselves -and leave me out in the cold. My father -pays my way and I don’t see why I should play -second fiddle to anybody.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">[93]</span>“You will not be asked to play second fiddle, as -you term it, Hockley,” said the professor. “But -at the same time I will allow no fighting. We are -here to see the sights, and I expect you all to behave -like young gentlemen. If you did not kick -Mark in the ankle on purpose you should at least -have been more careful of your steps, for a sprained -ankle is nothing to fool with. I see your mouth is -bleeding. You had better bathe it in yonder pool. -And Newton, you go to the next pool and bathe your -nose, and remember, this is the first and last fighting -to be done on this trip.”</p> - -<p>Glad to get off thus easily the two boys walked -away as directed and each did what he could to stop -the flow of blood. Sam and Darry wanted to go -after Frank but the professor stopped them.</p> - -<p>“I want you two to help me with Mark,” said -Professor Strong. “I have found a native with -several mules. He was carrying cane cuttings to -Caracas, but I have hired him to drop his loads for -the present and carry us instead. If you will join -hands and catch Mark under the knees I will take -him under the arms, and we can carry him to the -road.”</p> - -<p>They soon had the crippled youth up and the professor<span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">[94]</span> -pointed out the direction in which the road -over the mountain lay. The path to the point was -thickly overgrown with brush and they had literally -to force their way along. It was rough and more -than once Mark felt like crying out but showed his -grit by shutting his teeth and keeping silent.</p> - -<p>Frank soon followed the three and Hockley did -the same. The bully presently ranged up beside -the smaller youth.</p> - -<p>“Just you wait, I’ll get square yet,” he said, in a -low tone.</p> - -<p>“I’m not afraid of you,” retorted Frank, who -was satisfied that he had fully “kept up his end of -the log,” as the saying is.</p> - -<p>“The next time we come to blows I’ll not be so -easy on you,” went on Hockley. He was very angry -to think that the smaller boy had not been afraid of -him.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps I won’t be so easy either, Hockley,” -was Frank’s answer, and then he ran on, to aid the -others in getting Mark to the mule path.</p> - -<p>Down on the path they found the native, a little, -dried-up old Venezuelan, who had seven mules in -his charge. The patient little beasts were scarcely<span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">[95]</span> -higher than Darry’s shoulder. Four had been unloaded -but the others stood in the road with loads -of sugarcane cuttings so large that only their eyes -and noses could be seen.</p> - -<p>“Gracious what loads!” murmured Darry, as he -gazed at the mules.</p> - -<p>“These mules will carry about all you can put on -them,” said the professor, with a smile. “I have -seen one mule carrying three men, and trotting along -at that.”</p> - -<p>The mules to be used by our friends were soon -ready, and then Mark was placed on the back of the -one the native said was the best. Presently all were -“aboard,” as Darry expressed it, and the native led -the procession in the direction of Caracas.</p> - -<p>They could already see the outskirts of the city, -which is located on the southern slope of the La -Silla Mountain. To every side were mountain -peaks, with here and there a small valley with -streams of water of more or less importance. On -the sides of the mule path were plantains and -palms, and further out the sugar and coffee plantations, -with their queer little huts and houses of pink, -blue, and white.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">[96]</span>“How large a place is Caracas?” questioned -Sam, as they moved along as rapidly as Mark’s condition -permitted.</p> - -<p>“There has been no accurate census taken for -years, but the population is probably 75,000 souls. -You see the laboring classes—called peons here—object -to being enumerated for fear it may mean military -service, and so they hide when the census man -comes around. The whole valley in which the city -lies numbers probably 150,000 souls.”</p> - -<p>“The houses look a good deal alike to me,” observed -Sam, as they made their way down one of the -highways leading directly to the Plaza Bolivar, a -park in the center of Caracas. “They all have mud -and plaster walls, red-tiled roofs, windows with bars -over them and no chimneys.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, I noticed the absence of chimneys,” put in -Frank, whose nose had now stopped bleeding. -“Wonder what they do when they want fire in a -house?”</p> - -<p>“They never want fire,” answered Professor -Strong. “It is too warm for a fire. That is why -they don’t have glass to the windows.”</p> - -<p>“But they must cook.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">[97]</span>“They do, but they use charcoal and burn it in a -little contrivance something like a tinsmith’s stove. -You’ll see plenty of them before you leave for -home.”</p> - -<p>“They seem to paint their houses all colors,” -muttered Hockley, who now that Frank had spoken -felt he too must say something. “There is a blue -and a white, and there is a red, and here is a brown, -and over yonder an orange.”</p> - -<p>“Yes they use any color they please,” answered -the professor. “It is sometimes the only way of -telling one’s house from that of a neighbor. They -may look ugly to you from the outside, but you’ll -find many of them quite handsome and very comfortable -within.”</p> - -<p>They had now entered the city proper and the -sights and sounds around them interested the boys -so much that they forgot to talk. Natives were -hurrying by with huge bundles on their heads or -balanced over their shoulders, little children with -hardly any clothes were playing in the roadway, -and the street was almost filled with pedlers and -others on mule back. At one spot they encountered -a native driving several cows.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">[98]</span>“He’s delivering his milk,” said the professor. -“He finds out how much a customer wants and -then milks one of his cows to that extent.”</p> - -<p>“Then the milk ought to be fresh and rich,” said -Mark, who had found the ride surprisingly comfortable -despite the awkward appearance of his -steed.</p> - -<p>“It is fresh enough, but not particularly rich, for -the cows roam where they please and rarely get -enough to eat.”</p> - -<p>“I should think a fellow would get all mixed up -in a city where the houses are so much alike,” said -Sam.</p> - -<p>“You won’t get mixed after you get the run of -the place, Winthrop. Remember that all the streets -start from the cathedral at the Plaza Bolivar. The -four streets there are called Avenue North, East, -South, and West, and then follow Second Street -North, Second Street East, and so on.”</p> - -<p>A few minutes more of riding brought them to -the hotel at which they were to remain during their -stop in Caracas. The professor went inside and announced -their arrival and then the boys and he assisted -Mark to alight. They passed through a large<span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">[99]</span> -iron gateway into a beautiful square filled with -flowers, where a fountain was playing. Then a -servant came to lead them to their rooms, which were -all on the ground floor, and in a few minutes more -they could truly say they were at home in Caracas.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">[100]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XI<br /> - -<small>THE PROFESSOR MEETS AN OLD FRIEND</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">How</span> does the ankle feel?” asked Frank, on the -morning following the arrival at the hotel.</p> - -<p>“Somewhat sore, but I can stand on it,” answered -Mark. “I guess it will be all right again in -a day or two;” and it was, although Mark was careful -of the member for some time longer.</p> - -<p>Under the guidance of the professor the boys made -several tours of the city. They first visited the Capitol -building, but a short distance from their hotel. -The Capitol is but one story high, but it occupies an -entire square, and is by far the finest building in Venezuela. -In the center is a large court, where a fountain -plays constantly and where grow the most -beautiful of tropical flowers. Here are a number of -rich marble statues.</p> - -<p>Opening up from the court are the various official -offices—the Senate and Chamber of Deputies, Interior -and War Departments, Supreme Court, and -others. At one end is a large hall, two hundred feet<span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">[101]</span> -long, with inlaid flooring, where public receptions are -held. Here can also be found the portraits of various -notables of Venezuelan history.</p> - -<p>“This is Simon Bolivar, the Washington of South -America,” said the professor, as they stopped in front -of a massive portrait at the end of the gallery. “He -was born in this city in 1783, of wealthy parents of -rank, and was sent to Spain to be educated. He became -a lawyer and traveled extensively. While visiting -the United States he became infused with the -spirit of liberty, and returning home joined the -patriots who were trying to throw off the yoke of -Spain. He fought in a number of battles and then -went to England to ask for aid from that country. -But England would grant him nothing, and to escape -the wrath of Spain he had to flee to Curaçao. -But he was not disheartened, and soon after returned -to South America. He began to raise troops of volunteers, -and fought many more battles, in nearly all -of which he was victorious. At last in 1813, he entered -Caracas as a conqueror, was hailed as a liberator, -and made absolute dictator in civil and military -affairs. More battles followed, and Bolivar had to -flee again, this time to Hayti. But he was undaunted, -and coming back whipped the Spaniards once more<span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">[102]</span> -and helped to unite New Granada and Venezuela into -the Republic of Colombia. After that he went to -Peru and aided the Peruvians in establishing their -freedom and a part of the country was named Bolivia -in his honor. He died in 1842.”</p> - -<p>“Certainly a great man,” said Darry. “What a -lot of excitement he must have passed through!”</p> - -<p>“He certainly did. At first he was but little appreciated, -but as time goes by the people realize what -a truly great man he was.”</p> - -<p>“There is a statue of him in Central Park, New -York,” put in Frank. “I have seen it a number of -times, and so has Mark.”</p> - -<p>“You will find statues of Bolivar all over South -America and also in Central America and Mexico. -When the folks here realized what he had done for -them, they went wild, and his ashes were brought -here with great pomp and ceremony. He is undoubtedly -the foremost figure in South American -history for three hundred years.”</p> - -<p>Professor Strong had received a pass to the Senate -Chamber, and they took a brief look at this somewhat -bare apartment, with its stiff chairs, and its absence -of regular desks.</p> - -<p>“Does the President get much?” asked Hockley,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">[103]</span> -as they came to a halt out in the court where the -fountain was playing.</p> - -<p>“I believe his salary is $12,000 a year. Besides -this he gets his house and servants free, also his livery, -the same as our own President. But you must -remember that the President here is a good deal of a -dictator and can use the money of the government -pretty much as he pleases. Sometimes a president -draws money to suit himself, and then comes a revolution. -This is not alone true of Venezuela, but it is -true of many other South American republics.”</p> - -<p>Before leaving the Capitol building they looked in -at the Treasury Department, and Frank asked about -the money of the country.</p> - -<p>“I’ve got some of their silver, but I must say I -can’t tell what it is,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Well, this is a bolivar,” said the professor, taking -a silver piece somewhat smaller than our quarter -from his pocket. “This bolivar is worth twenty -cents. The next smaller coin is a real, worth ten -cents. Then comes a medio, five cents, a quartillo, -two-and-a-half cents, and a centavo, which explains -itself.”</p> - -<p>“But isn’t there anything larger than a bolivar?” -asked Darry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">[104]</span>“Yes, there are two and two-and-a-half bolivars, -and a peso fuerte, which is worth one dollar. After -that come the gold coins, worth four dollars and -twenty dollars. I will show you all of them when -we get back to the hotel.”</p> - -<p>Leaving the Capitol, they crossed the square to a -beautiful building of white marble. This is the Central -University, the leading institution of learning -of the Republic.</p> - -<p>“This is not a large college as such institutions -are counted in our country,” said the professor. -“There are, I was told, about thirty professors and -the students number about 400. But the course of -study is very thorough, and embraces literature, art, -law, medicine, science, engineering and theology. -Here is also located the National Library of forty-five -thousand volumes, many of which are rare and -valuable. We will walk through, for I am inclined -to think there is a professor here with whom I am -well acquainted.”</p> - -<p>They walked through the library building first, -with its long shelves of books and its cabinets of rare -folios, and then into the college proper. Here the -professor hailed a passing student and asked concerning -his friend.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">[105]</span>“<i>Si, señor</i>, he is here,” said the student, in Spanish. -“He teaches our class in engineering. Would -you like to see him?”</p> - -<p>“I would indeed,” answered Professor Strong. -“He and I were college students together.”</p> - -<p>“Then follow me to the class room. He is at his -desk. The session has not yet begun.”</p> - -<p>Passing through a long and high corridor, they -came to one of the class-rooms and entered. At a -tall desk at one end sat a man of forty-five, working -out a problem on a sheet of paper. He was evidently -a Spaniard but one who had seen a great deal of the -world.</p> - -<p>“How are you, Morano,” said the professor, stepping -up and touching him on the arm.</p> - -<p>The professor in engineering started up and stared -for a moment. Then his face broke out into a warm -smile, and he caught Professor Strong in both arms -after the fashion of many foreigners.</p> - -<p>“Strong, my own very dear friend, Amos -Strong!” he cried, in a rich Spanish accent. “Where -in the world have you come from, and when did you -arrive? It is wonderful! I am so glad! You are -yourself, but you look older. And these boys? Some -of your sons perhaps?” And he took the professor’s<span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">[106]</span> -hands and shook them over and over -again.</p> - -<p>“I am glad to see you, Morano,” was the professor’s -equally warm reply. “It is fully fifteen -years since we parted, in Paris, after a tour of the -Old World. I tried to see you when I was here before, -but you were down in Peru, helping to build a -railroad bridge.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, that is so, I remember now. I could not -stand it to teach—it is so hard, so steady, so confining. -Outside it is different. One gets the air, one -can walk about, and one is more happy. Then these -are your sons? What are their names?”</p> - -<p>“No, they are not my sons. I am not married.”</p> - -<p>“Indeed! A happy bachelor. So am I. Then they -are——?”</p> - -<p>“They are my pupils. I have brought them to -South America to show them something of the -country.” The professor brought each one forward -and mentioned his name. “Boys, this is Professor -Enrique Morano, a very dear friend of mine, who -once attended Yale with me, and who afterward -made a tour of Europe with me and several other -students.”</p> - -<p>“I am charmed to meet so many from the dear<span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">[107]</span> -United States,” said Professor Morano, as he shook -hands all around. “It is a great country and I am -sorry I could not remain in it longer. But my respected -father—peace to his ashes!—wished me to -return.”</p> - -<p>“Then your father is dead?” asked Professor -Strong.</p> - -<p>“Yes, he died but four months ago. He took a -trip to Nicaragua, and the journey was too hard for -him. He left me utterly alone. But I should not -bother you with my family afflictions. You are of -course stopping in Caracas.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” and Professor Strong mentioned the hotel.</p> - -<p>“You must come to my home—it is just outside of -the city, on the road to Valencia. I am alone there -with the servants and I will be pleased to have company, -and doubly pleased that it is you. You must -make the home your own.”</p> - -<p>“We shall be pleased to call,” said Professor -Strong.</p> - -<p>“Why cannot you go there this evening, after the -session is over here?” urged Enrique Morano. “We -must talk of old times, must we not? Your pupils -can inspect the coffee plantation which my late -father purchased just before he died. It is now mine,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">[108]</span> -but I must confess I know not what to do with it. I -am no planter. I am but a civil engineer and—a -hunter, like yourself,” and the Spanish teacher -laughed.</p> - -<p>“We will go, and gladly,” answered Amos -Strong. “I wish the boys to examine a coffee plantation -thoroughly.”</p> - -<p>“Will you be at the hotel at five o’clock? If so I -will send my carriage for you.”</p> - -<p>So it was arranged, and in a moment more they -left the class room, for while the conversation was -going on the place had been filling with pupils, many -of whom stared curiously at the strangers.</p> - -<p>“A nice man,” was Darry’s comment when they -were outside. He turned to the professor: “I don’t -wonder you took to him for a college friend.”</p> - -<p>“There is no better man than Henry Morano,” -was Amos Strong’s reply. “I liked him from the -first. He is a splendid scholar and an equally good -hunter in the bargain. You can rest assured of a -good time when you are in his company. We are -very fortunate in meeting him.”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">[109]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XII<br /> - -<small>MARKEL AGAIN TO THE FRONT</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">We</span> will now go over to the City Hall,” said -Professor Strong, when they found themselves in the -Plaza once more. “It is a spot full of interest, especially -for all people of South America, for it was -to them the Cradle of Liberty, the same as our Independence -Hall at Philadelphia.”</p> - -<p>The building was but a step away, an ancient -looking affair, with thick adobe walls and small slits -of windows. The rooms are, many of them, small -and uncomfortable, and the decorations tawdry to a -degree.</p> - -<p>“Independence was proclaimed here on July 5th, -1811,” said Professor Strong, as they entered a -council chamber located at one corner. “Here the -very best representatives of the country assembled to -throw off the yoke of Spain. Yonder is a faded picture -depicting the event, and the important looking -document on the wall opposite is the declaration itself.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">[110]</span> -The paper was drawn up by Francisco Miranda, -an able leader, especially civilly, although he was not -so successful in the battle field as Simon Bolivar. -Miranda was a great friend to La Fayette, and when -La Fayette sailed to America Miranda went with -him and served all through the Revolutionary War -under Washington. This planted in his breast the -same seed of liberty that was planted in the breast of -Bolivar.”</p> - -<p>“That shows how far-reaching was the influence -of our Revolution,” remarked Sam. “We threw -that tea overboard to some purpose, didn’t we?”</p> - -<p>“What is this thing?” asked Hockley, pointing -to a faded banner hanging close at hand.</p> - -<p>“That is a relic of Pizarro at the time he went to -conquer Peru. He carried that banner all through -his trail of fire and blood, doing it in the name of -the church, but with a cruelty only equaled by the -worst of savages. This is not the whole of the banner. -It was cut in half and the other portion is in -the National Museum at Bogota.”</p> - -<p>An hour was spent at the City Hall viewing other -objects of interest, including the great city marriage -register and the various portraits on the walls. Then -they walked past the Municipal Theater and on to the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">[111]</span> -new market place, a neat building with cement floor, -where the stalls were divided by lattice-work.</p> - -<p>“There is another market place,” said Professor -Strong, “and at present business is divided between -the two. At the other place there are no stalls, but -the traders simply lay their stuff in a heap on the -ground and sit beside it.”</p> - -<p>“How nice the vegetables and fruits look!” exclaimed -Frank. “I never saw anything fresher.”</p> - -<p>“They have fresh vegetables the year around -here, for they will grow at any time the seed is put -in the ground. They are all picked at night or early -in the morning and brought to the market on mule -or donkey back. You can see for yourself that they -have all the ordinary vegetables with which we are -acquainted. They also have others, like for instance -that yucca, and the arrowroot, bread-fruit, and many -kinds of bananas and delicious pineapples.”</p> - -<p>“There is an alligator pear,” said Mark. “I’ve -seen them on some high-toned fruit stands in New -York.”</p> - -<p>“The native name is aguacate. Did you notice -the size of the muskmelons? They are just as sweet -as they look, and those big, long whitish peas will -melt like butter in your mouth.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">[112]</span>It was now growing hot, and they were glad -enough to leave the market place and go back to the -hotel. As they rambled around they had met many -natives going to or coming from business, some faultlessly -dressed in white duck suits and broad Panama -hats. Many of the hats were exceedingly fine in texture.</p> - -<p>“I once owned one that I used at times for six -years,” said the professor, speaking of the hats. “I -could jam it in anywhere and it always came forth -looking as good as ever. But it cost me thirty-five -dollars.”</p> - -<p>“Phew! that’s rather steep,” cried Darry. “But -I’ve heard of such big prices before.”</p> - -<p>The boys had found the service at the hotel of the -best. The servants were numerous and did everything -with a gravity which at times was to them -almost comical. They were very attentive to all details, -and the guests were not permitted to do a -single thing for themselves.</p> - -<p>“My gracious, I think they would eat for me if -I asked them,” said Darry. “Never saw such waiters -in my life. That fellow pushed my chair around for -me, held the glass of water, handed the bill of fare -and didn’t give me a chance to lay it down, and held<span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">[113]</span> -the butter pat while I buttered my bread. It goes -ahead of anything I ever experienced before.”</p> - -<p>“Reckon they’re laying back for tips,” growled -Hockley. “I’ve heard that all these foreign fellows -think they can sponge on the Yankees every time.”</p> - -<p>“You won’t have to tip them,” answered Professor -Strong, dryly. “I will attend to that when I -settle our bills.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I don’t mind tipping them,” answered the -lank youth, hastily. “I always give the waiters -something at home.”</p> - -<p>After lunch the whole party took it easy in the -court by the fountain, where there were numerous -easy chairs and hammocks. Mark and Frank fell -asleep, and soon after Darry and Sam followed. -But Hockley was restless and at last got up to walk -around.</p> - -<p>He had just entered the office of the hotel when -the clerk came toward him holding up an envelope.</p> - -<p>“A message for Mistair Jacob Hockley,” he said.</p> - -<p>“That’s my name,” returned Hockley, and took -the message wondering whom it was from and what -it contained.</p> - -<p>It was a cablegram, sent from Curaçao, and was -signed “Daniel Markel.” It read as follows:</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">[114]</span>“Unexpectedly delayed. Coming to-morrow. -Meet me at Hotel Ziroda.”</p> -</div> - -<p>“So he was delayed and is coming to-morrow,” -muttered Hockley, as he gazed at the cablegram. -“Hullo, it’s dated yesterday. In that case he’ll be -at the Hotel Ziroda to-day. I’d like to know what -he has to say for himself.”</p> - -<p>Stuffing the message in his pocket he went up to -the clerk and asked that individual where the Hotel -Ziroda was located. Receiving the information he -started to go back to where he had left the professor, -then suddenly changed his mind.</p> - -<p>“He may refuse me if I ask him about going,” he -mused. “I’d better go and say nothing.” And off -he started, bent on seeing Dan Markel and learning -what the man from Baltimore had to say for himself.</p> - -<p>The Hotel Ziroda was an ancient hostelry, square -in shape, with a small arched doorway leading to the -inevitable court inside. It had seen better days and -was far from prosperous. A greasy landlord sat in -a wicker chair, half asleep, and with a lighted cigar -hanging from his teeth.</p> - -<p>“Hullo, are you the proprietor?” asked Hockley, -touching him on the arm.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">[115]</span>“What do you want?” asked the man, in Spanish, -as he tried to rouse up.</p> - -<p>“I say, are you the proprietor?”</p> - -<p>“<i>Si, señor.</i>”</p> - -<p>“Is there a man here by the name of Markel—Daniel -Markel? He came from Willemstad yesterday?”</p> - -<p>“<i>Si, señor.</i> Markel, <i>señor</i>, he ees here. Come, I -show you.”</p> - -<p>With a profound sigh the hotel man arose and conducted -Hockley through the dirty court to a room -in one corner of the building. He knocked and a -voice inside called out: “Who’s there?”</p> - -<p>“It’s me,” answered Hockley, without regard to -grammar.</p> - -<p>“Me, who?”</p> - -<p>“Hockley. I just got your cablegram.”</p> - -<p>“Oh!” Markel leaped from the bed upon which -he had been lying and opened the door. “Glad -to see you. Come in,” and Hockley went in, -and the hotel proprietor left the pair to themselves.</p> - -<p>The room was large and scantily furnished, with a -bed, washstand, table and one chair. On the table -stood Markel’s valise, a bottle of liquor and a glass,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">[116]</span> -and a box of cigars. The room was half full of -smoke and smelt far from pleasant.</p> - -<p>“Never so sorry in all my life,” said the man from -Baltimore, as he drew up the chair for Hockley to sit -down while he sank on the edge of the bed. “I suppose -you thought I had given you the go by.” He -glanced keenly at the lank youth to see the effect of -his words.</p> - -<p>“I—I didn’t know what to think,” stammered -Hockley.</p> - -<p>“When I found the steamer gone I was fairly -wild, Hockley, indeed I was. I said to myself, -‘He’ll think I’m a thief sure, for I’ve a cool half -hundred of his money.’ I wanted to send you word, -but I was so upset I forgot about the cable until afterwards. -Here, have a drink and I’ll tell you all about -it.”</p> - -<p>He handed Hockley the bottle and the glass, and -the youth had not the courage to resist. He took a -small drink of the fiery stuff, which fairly burnt his -throat as he swallowed it.</p> - -<p>“Well, how did it happen?” he questioned.</p> - -<p>“It was a funny thing. I went ashore to transact -a little business with an old Dutch importer who used -to do business with a firm that can oysters in Baltimore.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">[117]</span> -Well, while I was in the place two natives -came in and another native followed. First thing -I knew one of the first natives had picked the other’s -pocket. The man who was robbed accused the third -native of the crime. There was a big row and they -were going to carry off the innocent man to jail when -I stepped up and told the old Dutchman how it was -and what I had seen. A policeman was called, and -as a consequence I had to go to the station house -and remain there all night as a witness to the affair. -I tried my best to get away and to send you word, -but I couldn’t do a thing with those sleepy Dutch -officials. They left me to my misery and there I had -to remain until ten o’clock the next morning. Then -the case came up and what do you think? Nobody -made any charge and everybody was dismissed: Disgusted? -Well, of course I was, but what could I -do?”</p> - -<p>“It was enough to make anybody mad,” was -Hockley’s comment.</p> - -<p>“I threatened to sue the city for false imprisonment, -but they only laughed at me. So then I hunted -up a vessel bound for La Guayra and finally sent the -cablegram—and here I am. How have you been?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I’m well enough.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">[118]</span>“Seen anything of the city?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, the professor has piloted us to one place -and another. But it’s mighty slow looking at old -buildings and documents and pictures, I didn’t -come for that. I came for a good time.”</p> - -<p>“Right you are, and a good time you shall have, -so long as we are together. I promised to show you -the ins and outs of Caracas and I’m going to do it,” -concluded Dan Markel as he slapped Hockley on the -back. “We’ll paint the town red, eh?”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">[119]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIII<br /> - -<small>A PLANTATION HOME IN VENEZUELA</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Guess</span> I’ve been asleep, and guess the others have -been asleep, too.”</p> - -<p>It was Frank who uttered the words as he roused -up and rubbed his eyes. Mark was still sleeping and -Darry and Sam had just stirred like himself. The -professor was dozing with a guide book resting on -his lap. Everything around the hotel was quiet, -only the dripping of the fountain breaking the stillness.</p> - -<p>“It’s a sleepy man’s land during midday,” remarked -Darry, as he arose slowly to his feet. “The -air takes all the ambition out of a fellow. I don’t -wonder that no business is transacted excepting during -the early morning and late in the afternoon.”</p> - -<p>The boys walked around the hotel and then into -the street beyond. A few natives were moving about, -but that was all. The sun, striking the pavement, -made the place like a furnace, and they were glad to -retreat once more to the shelter of the court.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">[120]</span>“Where is Hockley?” asked Professor Strong, -as he, too, roused up.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” answered Darry, and the others -said the same.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps he is taking a look around on his own -account,” suggested Mark. “He said something -about wanting to see the lumber yards, so that he -could write to his father and tell him how they handled -lumber down here.”</p> - -<p>“They handle it here very much as they do everywhere -else in South America,” answered the professor. -“Some is carried on wagons, but a great deal -is transported on the backs of mules.”</p> - -<p>“How can a mule carry a long stick of timber?” -asked Frank. “If he carried it sideways it would -more than block the street.”</p> - -<p>“They use two or more mules and it is wonderful -how they balance the loads. Then, too, the natives -carry a great lot of things on their shoulders and -heads.”</p> - -<p>“What are the real natives?” asked Darry. “I’ve -seen all sorts of people here—white, black, red, and -mixed.”</p> - -<p>“The real natives are the Indians, Crane,” returned -the professor, with a smile. “They lived<span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">[121]</span> -here long before the days of Columbus, just as they -inhabited our own country. Next to the Indians -come the Spaniards who were the first settlers. The -Spaniards introduced the negroes, who came from -Africa and from the West Indies as slaves. The intermixture -of these races have produced the mestizoes, -who are of Spanish and Indian blood, the -mulattoes, of negro and creole blood, and the zambos, -of negro and Indian blood. These people are also -intermixed, so that it is sometimes impossible to tell -what a person is.”</p> - -<p>“Like the man in New York who came up to be -naturalized,” said Mark. “His father was an -Englishman and his mother a Frenchwoman. His -grandfather had been born in Germany and his -grandmother in Italy. He had emigrated to Canada -and there married a Canadian Indian woman. Then -he had moved down to New York, and his oldest -daughter had married an Irishman. If they have any -children it will be hard to tell what they will be.” -And there was a general laugh at this sally.</p> - -<p>“They’ll be Americans,” said Frank. “Uncle -Sam’s flag is wide and broad enough to cover them -all, if they care to come under the folds of Old -Glory.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">[122]</span>At last came the hour when Enrique Morano’s carriage -could be expected and soon a fine turnout hove -into sight, drawn by a team of white horses.</p> - -<p>“That’s as fine a carriage as any in Central Park,” -said Frank.</p> - -<p>“It is probably of United States manufacture,” -answered the professor. “We export a great number -of vehicles to South America.”</p> - -<p>“Evidently they appreciate good horseflesh,” put -in Mark. “Here come a couple of horsemen now. -The town is beginning to wake up.”</p> - -<p>The horsemen dashed by in a spirited manner, -clad in white with broad sashes at their waists, and -wearing sweeping hats which flapped gracefully in -the warm wind. In the rear rode an attendant, carrying -a small hamper filled with refreshments.</p> - -<p>As Hockley was not at hand, the professor asked -the driver of the carriage to wait a little, while he -took a look around the square. But the youth was -nowhere to be seen and Professor Strong came back -looking somewhat worried.</p> - -<p>“He knew when we were to leave,” he said. “I -can’t understand this.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, Hockley takes his time about everything,”<span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">[123]</span> -put in Sam. “He said he was down here for pleasure, -and that he was going to suit himself.”</p> - -<p>“He has no right to keep the whole party waiting,” -answered the professor briefly. He said no -more, but his eyes showed that his mind was busy.</p> - -<p>“Hockley will get a lecture when he shows up,” -whispered Frank to Darry.</p> - -<p>“He’ll get only what he deserves, Darry. Isn’t -that so, Beans?”</p> - -<p>“To be sure,” came from Sam. “He howled -about us delaying him at the railroad cliff; now -he’s doing the same thing himself.”</p> - -<p>Quarter of an hour went by and the boys wondered -if the professor would make them give up the -trip if Hockley did not return. Then came a messenger -with a note for Professor Strong. The note -was from Hockley and ran as follows:</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Dear Professor Strong</span>: Have just met -some old friends of my father, and they wish me to -spend the evening with them as they are bound for -Philadelphia to-morrow. Please excuse me from -going to that plantation with you. Will be at the -hotel when you get back.”</p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">[124]</span>“Hockley has met some friends and wishes to stay -with them a few hours,” said the professor. “We -will go without him.”</p> - -<p>“I’m just as well satisfied,” murmured Mark, but -in a low voice, so that Professor Strong did not hear -him.</p> - -<p>They were soon seated in the carriage, the negro -driver touched up the pair, and away they rolled, -down the smooth street, around a corner of the -public square and on toward the road leading to -Valencia, which is located on the lake of the same -name, and on the line of a railroad between the two -points.</p> - -<p>“When I was here before, the railroad ran no -further than Victory, a two days’ drive in a carriage,” -said the professor, when Caracas was left -behind and they found themselves climbing over the -hills on a road lined with beautiful tropical trees. -“Now one can go straight through to Valencia -and also part of the way around the lake. There -is also a railroad from Valencia to Puerto Cabello, -on the seacoast, west of La Guayra, and a steamer -runs every ten days between the two seaports.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t see much but coffee plantations around -here,” observed Mark.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">[125]</span>“Coffee and cocoa is the great industry in this -valley, for Caracas affords an easy market for shipments. -Caracas chocolate, made from the cocoa -bean, is known everywhere, and so is Maracaibo -coffee.”</p> - -<p>“Hockley was saying that Mocha coffee came -from here,” put in Frank. “But I said it came -from Arabia.”</p> - -<p>“So it does come from Arabia. But there is a -kind of coffee grown here which is a good deal like -Mocha in flavor and is often sold as such.”</p> - -<p>“I’d like to know something about coffee raising,” -put in Darry. “We drink so much of the stuff that -I think we ought to know about it.”</p> - -<p>“I will explain when we get to Professor Morano’s -plantation.”</p> - -<p>An hour’s drive from Caracas brought them to -the entrance of the plantation and they passed -through a wide gateway along a broad and well kept -path lined with giant palms. Between the palms -were urns of flowers, all blooming in red, yellow and -blue. Trailing vines were also in evidence, and they -covered the stone wall which separated the plantation -from the highway.</p> - -<p>The plantation house proved to be an old and substantial<span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">[126]</span> -affair, one story in height, and occupying the -space of a small city block. The outside was decorated -with stucco work painted in pale blue and -yellow. There was the usual archway in front, over -which was erected a lattice-work covered with trailing -plants.</p> - -<p>The civil engineer, for such Enrique Morano -really was, was already there to receive them, in -spotless white, even to the tie with a diamond which -he wore.</p> - -<p>“Welcome, three times welcome to all of you!” -he cried, gaily, as he ran forward and assisted Professor -Strong to alight. “You have given me a -great pleasure by coming, and while you stay you -must make yourselves perfectly at home.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you, we will, Morano,” answered the professor.</p> - -<p>They were soon inside the building, which was -built, like so many others, in the form of a hollow -square. The patio was a garden of flowers, with a -single giant palm in the center. There was a broad -veranda running entirely around the house, with two -steps at either side of the passage leading to the outside. -The flooring of the veranda was of two kinds -of wood, laid in fancy designs.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">[127]</span>“Come into the parlor,” said Enrique Morano, -and led the way into an apartment facing the highway -beyond. It was a room at least twenty feet -square, with a polished floor partly covered with -rugs. The furniture was of hardwoods, elaborately -carved but without any fixed coverings.</p> - -<p>“Not so very different from a summer parlor at -home,” whispered Frank, when they were left alone -for a moment.</p> - -<p>“They don’t cover the furniture on account of the -bugs and insects,” said the professor.</p> - -<p>Opening up from the parlor was a library and -smoking room. Enrique Morano had furnished this -to suit himself, and it was very much in the style of a -rich college man at Princeton or Yale. There was a -case of books and files of the latest papers and magazines, -and also a case containing cigars, cigarettes, -smoking tobacco and pipes.</p> - -<p>“A regular den!” cried Professor Strong, his -face brightening. “And just as you had it in the -olden days.”</p> - -<p>“It reminds me of good old times,” answered -Enrique Morano. “Those college days! I shall -never forget them, nor the many friends I made in -the United States.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_128">[128]</span>He asked them to sit down, while he offered the -professor a cigar. The boys were glad enough to -look over the files of native papers and Spanish -magazines, although they could read but little. -There were <i>El Diario de Caracas</i>, the leading daily -of the capital, <i>El Pregonero</i>, another daily, and a -magazine with some reproductions of pictures from -American and foreign weeklies.</p> - -<p>“What funny advertisements,” said Mark, as he -spelt one and another out. “Here is a store that -has for sale American sewing machines of the latest -fashions, and another that sells clothing that will -make a man look like a President.”</p> - -<p>While Professor Strong and his old friend were -smoking and conversing the boys were told to roam -through the house at will, and this they did. Next -to the library they found a dining hall, long and -broad, with a table in the center which was so heavy -none of the boys could budge it. Here the tableware -was of solid silver and of the finest cut glass.</p> - -<p>Passing from the dining hall, they entered a narrow -corridor, with bed chambers on either side. Here -the windows were covered with bamboo or venetian -blinds. All of the beds stood in the center of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_129">[129]</span> -apartments, never against a wall. There were handsome -dressing cabinets, also of massive wood in -fancy designs. Between the bedrooms was a large -bathroom, where the bath was nothing less than a -small swimming pool, the top being on a level with -the floor.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah! a fellow can take a regular swim -here!” cried Frank. “No wonder these folks look -so clean. I’d want to bathe in that all the time.”</p> - -<p>Beyond the bedrooms was the kitchen, in which -the most of the food for the table was prepared. -Attached to the kitchen was a small room of rough -stone, in which were located half a dozen tiny charcoal -stoves for cooking.</p> - -<p>The servants attached to the place were as interesting -as the house itself. A little negro boy went -around with them. He had learned to say, “Yes, -mistair,” and “No, mistair,” and he repeated these -over and over again, each time bowing profoundly -and rolling his eyes in a truly comical fashion. The -boy’s name was Bulo, and our friends took to him -from the start.</p> - -<p>“Pretty big house,” said Mark, as they stopped -near the kitchen, where a dozen girls were at work,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_130">[130]</span> -some preparing dinner and some shining tableware, -all under the directions of a tall Spanish housekeeper.</p> - -<p>“Yes, mistair,” said Bulo, and bowed to the -ground.</p> - -<p>“How many servants?” questioned Darry.</p> - -<p>“No, mistair,” replied the little colored youth, -and bowed again.</p> - -<p>“I said, how many servants?” repeated Darry.</p> - -<p>“Yes, mistair, no mistair,” returned Bulo, and -bowed half a dozen times, then as the boys laughed -he laughed too, showing two rows of pure white -ivories.</p> - -<p>“You’re all right, Bulo,” said Mark, after the -merriment was over. “Here’s a souvenir for you,” -and he handed the colored boy a medio, which, as -mentioned before, is worth five cents.</p> - -<p>“Yes, mistair, yes, mistair,” said Bulo, with glistening -eyes. And as he stuffed the coin in his shirt, -he bowed half a dozen times again, and then, considering -himself dismissed ran off, singing at the -top of his voice.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_131">[131]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIV<br /> - -<small>A LOSS OF HONOR AND MONEY</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">We</span> will now go back to Dan Markel and Hockley, -and see how the lank youth fared at the hands of the -man from Baltimore.</p> - -<p>The proposition of Markel to “paint the town -red,” appealed to Hockley, but he looked glum when -he heard the words.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I’d like to go with you,” he said. “But I -can’t.”</p> - -<p>“Can’t? And why not, my dear boy?”</p> - -<p>“I’ve got to stay around with the professor and -the rest. We’re to visit a coffee plantation this -afternoon.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, that’s dead slow.”</p> - -<p>“I know it is, and I don’t want to go, but I don’t -see how I’m to get out of it.”</p> - -<p>Dan Markel lit a fresh cigar and handed the box -to his visitor. “We must think of some scheme,” -he said, slowly. “Ah, I have it. Write a note saying<span class="pagenum" id="Page_132">[132]</span> -that you have met some old friends and won’t -be back.”</p> - -<p>“But he’ll want to know about the friends to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“Will he? Then state they are about to sail—anything -to smooth it over. He can’t expect you to -tie fast to his coat-tails all the time, you know. -You’re too big for that.”</p> - -<p>“To be sure I’m too big,” blustered Hockley, -lighting one of the cigars and making an attempt to -enjoy it. “Let me have some paper and I’ll send -the note.”</p> - -<p>Paper was produced and also a pencil, and soon -the note was finished and given to one of the boys -outside to deliver. Of course the message was a -complete falsehood, yet it did not appear to trouble -Hockley’s conscience.</p> - -<p>“Now what shall we do first?” asked the youth, -after Markel had taken another drink from the -bottle.</p> - -<p>“When are the others going to start for that -plantation?”</p> - -<p>“They are starting about now,” answered Hockley, -after consulting his watch.</p> - -<p>“What time have you?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_133">[133]</span>“Half-past five.”</p> - -<p>“Ain’t you slow?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think so. This watch is a first-class timepiece, -and it ought to be, for it cost my dad a hundred -and twenty-five dollars.”</p> - -<p>“Is that so?” Dan Markel’s eyes glistened. -“Mine is a poor thing alongside of that. It only -cost twenty-five dollars.” He arose and stretched -himself. “Let us go and have something to eat -first, and then I’ll show you some sights worth -seeing.”</p> - -<p>They entered the dining room, and Markel ordered -an elaborate repast with wine. It was a long -time before it was served and then it was not nearly -as good as what Hockley had had at the other hotel.</p> - -<p>“Guess they’ve been changing cooks here,” observed -Markel, when he saw that the youth did not -relish the food. “Had splendid feed when I was -here before. The very freshest of everything. I’ll -have to find another place by to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“Come over to where we are,” suggested Hockley.</p> - -<p>“Thanks, perhaps I will.”</p> - -<p>It was dark by the time the repast was finished. -Markel made a pretense of paying the bill but allowed -his young friend to settle.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_134">[134]</span>“Say, but you are pretty well fixed,” he said, as he -eyed Hockley’s roll of bills. “I wish I could say as -much for myself.”</p> - -<p>“I’ve only got about a hundred dollars here,” answered -the lank youth, carelessly. “But I can get -the other when I want it.”</p> - -<p>“Did you have to put it in the professor’s care?”</p> - -<p>“No, he wanted it, but I told him I could take -care of it. I left it in my valise.”</p> - -<p>“But somebody may go through your valise.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think so. Besides, the money is under -a false bottom in the valise. You can’t open it -unless you touch a spring on the side.”</p> - -<p>“I see. That’s a handy thing. Well, let us be -going, or it will be time to return before we’ve seen -anything at all.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t care when I get back, Markel. I can -tell the professor that my friends kept me all night.”</p> - -<p>“Of course you can. Say, would you like to see -a real out-and-out cock fight? There is going to be -one to-night, in the rear of the Horn of Gold saloon. -The hotel keeper was telling me about it. He put -up five bolivars on one of the birds. All the best -sports in town will be there.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_135">[135]</span>“All right, let’s go—unless there’s a bull fight -on somewhere,” answered Hockley.</p> - -<p>“No bull fight to-night, Hockley. But that cock -fight will be a cooler, I can assure you. One of the -birds belongs to a Spanish millionaire, and the other -to one of the native generals in the army. We will -strike some high-toned people at the fight sure.”</p> - -<p>The prospect of going to a place where he would -meet the “dead game” sports of Caracas pleased -Hockley, and he already fancied how he would -“blow” about the affair when he got back among -his old cronies at home. “I’ll meet the bon-tons,” -he said to himself. “It’s a good deal better than -going to see a dried-up old coffee plantation.”</p> - -<p>They were soon on the way, down one broad street -and then into a side road which was little better -than an alleyway. At the end of the road stood a -ramshackle building dimly lit. Over the door hung -a gilded horn of plenty, giving to the resort its name, -Horn of Gold.</p> - -<p>Entering the drinking room they found a crowd -of thirty or forty assembled, of various nationalities, -some black and some white, with two or three of -Indian blood. At the rear a negro was strumming a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_136">[136]</span> -guitar and another was singing at the top of his -lungs, in order to make himself heard. But the -clanking of glasses and the loud talking all but -drowned out the music, if such it can be called.</p> - -<p>To a youth of good habits the surroundings would -have been disgusting to the last degree. But Hockley -took them in as “part of the game,” and said -nothing. Yet the thick tobacco smoke made him -dizzy, and he dropped his own cigar when Markel -was not looking.</p> - -<p>Hockley was at a disadvantage, since he could not -speak a word of the language. He listened attentively -for some English, but none was spoken.</p> - -<p>“Sit down here while I learn the particulars of -this fight,” said the man from Baltimore, and motioned -him to a seat in a corner, near the guitar -player. Then Markel went off, not to re-appear for -ten minutes.</p> - -<p>“It’s all right—I’ve got two tickets, but I had to -pay six bolivars for them,” said the man, on returning. -“Come this way.”</p> - -<p>They passed through a dark passageway and into -a small enclosure without a roof. There were several -rows of benches around a boarded-up ring in the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_137">[137]</span> -center. Half a dozen smoky lamps lit up this fighting -pit, as it was termed.</p> - -<p>“One bird is called the King and the other Favorita,” -said Markel. “The odds are on the King. -I’m going to lay a few bolivars on him.”</p> - -<p>“Do the same for me,” said Hockley and passed -over some silver coins. He was so dizzy from smoking -and drinking that he could scarcely remember -what the coins were worth.</p> - -<p>Markel made the bets, and soon the place began -to fill with the sports who had come to see the fight. -None of those who came in were the least bit “high-toned” -in appearance, much to Hockley’s chagrin, -nor did he behold a single military uniform, although -he had expected to see a number.</p> - -<p>“Must be an off night,” said Markel. “Here, -have another cigar. I see you have finished the -other.”</p> - -<p>He insisted upon Hockley smoking, and by the -time the cocks were brought in to fight the youth -was so dizzy he could scarcely see. The place was -filled with smoke, the crowd talked, laughed, cheered -and hissed, and oaths were by no means lacking. In -the midst of it all the birds fought until one was so<span class="pagenum" id="Page_138">[138]</span> -badly wounded that it died shortly afterwards and -the other was almost equally mutilated. And yet -some people call such cruelty sport! It is not sport -at all, simply an exhibition of brutality, the same as -bull baiting and prize fighting.</p> - -<p>“What did you say? Is it over?” asked Hockley, -trying to rouse himself from a sudden sickening -stupor into which he had fallen.</p> - -<p>“Yes, it’s over and our bird wasn’t in it,” replied -Markel. “What did you think of it?”</p> - -<p>“I couldn’t see much, on account of the poor -lights and the tobacco smoke.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, the light was beastly. But it was a gamey -fight, I can tell you that. Come on.”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t see many of the fashionables,” was -Hockley’s comment.</p> - -<p>“No. I was told there is a ball on somewhere -to-night and they must have gone there. Let us go -into the saloon and have a drink.”</p> - -<p>There was a crowd in the dark passageway and -Hockley found himself pushed first to one side and -then another. Markel was beside him, and the hands -of the man from Baltimore went into first one pocket -of the youth’s clothes and then another.</p> - -<p>As soon as they had reached the drinking place<span class="pagenum" id="Page_139">[139]</span> -Dan Markel insisted upon treating his companion -liberally. Then he settled the score and went out to -order a carriage to take them to the hotel.</p> - -<p>In such a condition that he could scarcely walk, -poor, deluded Hockley was assisted to the turnout -and Markel climbed in beside him. It was now -after midnight.</p> - -<p>“Say!” cried Hockley, suddenly. “My watch -is gone!”</p> - -<p>“Your watch?” ejaculated the man from Baltimore, -in well assumed surprise. “Are you certain?”</p> - -<p>“Course I’m certain—it’s gone—best gold watch,” -muttered Hockley, feeling into his various pockets -with difficulty.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you dropped it in the carriage,” went -on Markel, pretending to make a search. “It don’t -seem to be here.”</p> - -<p>“Some of those rascals at the cock fight robbed -me,” groaned Hockley. He dove into his vest -pockets. “Say! my money’s gone too!”</p> - -<p>“You don’t say!” cried Markel. “That is bad -and no mistake. You must have run afoul of a regular -thief. Is there anybody you suspect?”</p> - -<p>“Can’t say as there is. There was a nigger got -pretty close to me just after the fight ended.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_140">[140]</span>“Then he must be the man. Shall we go back?”</p> - -<p>“If he robbed me it ain’t likely he’s around now,” -groaned Hockley. He gave a deep yawn. “Hang -the luck anyway! Say, I feel awfully tired, I do.”</p> - -<p>His eyes closed and although he tried to keep -awake in a few minutes he was fast asleep. Dan -Markel eyed him curiously.</p> - -<p>“He was easier game than I thought of striking,” -said the man from Baltimore to himself. “A gold -watch and about a hundred dollars in cash. That’s -not so bad. Wonder what I had best do with him?”</p> - -<p>The carriage rolled on, and as it covered the distance -to the Hotel Ziroda, Dan Markel revolved the -situation in his mind. As the turnout came to a stop -a peculiar light flashed in the rascal’s dark eyes.</p> - -<p>“Might as well go the whole thing while I am at -it,” he said to himself. “I won’t be able to hoodwink -that professor as I have this young fellow. If I can -get the rest of the money I can clear out, and they’ll -never be able to find me.”</p> - -<p>He and the carriage driver assisted Hockley to -the ground, and then one of the hotel helpers came -forward and helped Markel get the youth to the -room which the man from Baltimore occupied. No -questions were asked, for such occurrences were not<span class="pagenum" id="Page_141">[141]</span> -uncommon among those who patronized the Hotel -Ziroda.</p> - -<p>“He will stay with me to-night,” said Markel. -“I will foot the bill whatever it is.”</p> - -<p>Laying Hockley on the bed, Markel allowed him -to sleep there, while he himself took a nap in a chair -by the window. The youth lay in a stupor, snoring -loudly, and was still snoring when Markel roused -up at six o’clock.</p> - -<p>“My friend wishes you to send around to his -hotel for his traveling bag,” said the man from Baltimore -to the clerk in the office. “Here is his card. -If Professor Strong is there, tell him that Mr. -Hockley wishes to get a souvenir from the bag to -give to his friend who is to sail to-day.”</p> - -<p>A messenger was sent off, and while he was gone -Dan Markel walked around anxiously. He was half -afraid Professor Strong would accompany the messenger -on the return, in which case it would perhaps -be best for him to leave by a back way and without -notice to anybody.</p> - -<p>The messenger was gone fully half an hour, but -when he returned he was alone, much to Markel’s -relief. He had Hockley’s valise and turned it over -to the man from Baltimore without question.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_142">[142]</span>When Markel re-entered the bed chamber the -poor fellow was stirring uneasily. But he did not -awaken and the rascal easily obtained from his -pocket the key to the traveling bag. Then the bag -was opened and Markel began a search for the -hidden spring.</p> - -<p>At last it was found, and the false bottom flew -up, revealing a pocket containing a flat pocketbook. -Hastily opening the wallet Markel saw that it was -filled with bank bills and gold to the amount of several -hundred dollars.</p> - -<p>“I’ve got it!” he muttered, his eyes glistening. -He closed the bag, locked it, and placed the wallet -in his own clothing. For a moment he hesitated, -then kicked the bag under the bed and hurried to -the door. As he passed out Hockley gave a long-drawn -sigh, turned over and went to sleep again.</p> - -<p>Once in the corridor, Dan Markel paused and -looked around. Nobody was in sight, and watching -his chance, he made his way to a side entrance of -the hotel and from there into the street. Then he -hurried on, down the square, and out of sight.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/p142.jpg" alt="" /></div> -<p class="caption">“I’ve got it,” he muttered.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_143">[143]</span> -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XV<br /> - -<small>SOMETHING ABOUT COFFEE GROWING</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">I feel</span> like a new boy,” remarked Mark, on the -morning following the arrival at Enrique Morano’s -plantation. “I slept like a top last night.”</p> - -<p>“So did I,” answered Frank. “That bed just -suited me. Wonder if anybody is stirring yet?”</p> - -<p>“They must be. I just heard Bulo singing. What -a sweet voice that darkey has.”</p> - -<p>The boys were soon dressed and out in the courtyard, -where the professor and the others presently -joined them.</p> - -<p>“We will have a regular American breakfast,” -said Enrique Morano. “Usually my countrymen -have nothing but a cup of coffee and a roll on rising, -but I dropped that habit when I stopped in the United -States.”</p> - -<p>“I noticed the coffee and rolls at the hotel,” said -Darry. “They are not very substantial.”</p> - -<p>Breakfast was soon served, of cantelopes, tapioca, -fish, rice cakes, rolls, and coffee and to it all did full<span class="pagenum" id="Page_144">[144]</span> -justice. The cantelopes were particularly fine and -fairly melted in the boys’ mouths.</p> - -<p>“I must go to the University in an hour,” said -Señor Morano. “But I have arranged for Greva, -my head steward, to take you all over the place and -explain whatever you desire to know. Greva speaks -very good English. I will be with you again at four -this afternoon, and then, if you wish, I will take -you off on a horseback ride into the country.”</p> - -<p>“We were thinking of getting back to Caracas -this afternoon,” said Professor Strong.</p> - -<p>“No, no, you must not think of it, my dear -Strong!” cried the civil engineer. “I will not listen. -You must remain to-night at least. I have so much -I wish to talk about to you.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, let us stay!” whispered Darry. “I’m just -aching for a good horseback ride.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, let us stay!” chimed in the others, and the -professor could not resist the appeal.</p> - -<p>“But what of Hockley?” he said. “He will be -wondering what became of us.”</p> - -<p>“Send him a letter to come out,” suggested Mark. -And this was done, the letter being carried to the -city by Enrique Morano himself.</p> - -<p>Immediately after Enrique Morano had departed,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_145">[145]</span> -the steward, Juan Greva, who had been already introduced, -came forward, and conducted them from -the house to the nursery attached to the place.</p> - -<p>“This is where we first grow our coffee plants,” -he said, in a strong Spanish accent. “We sow the -seeds in the ground and let the plant come up until -it is about a foot high before we transplant it to the -field.”</p> - -<p>“And how long does it take for them to grow as -high as that?” asked Sam.</p> - -<p>“About a year and a half. Then they are set out -in the field, which is first ploughed thoroughly and -planted with banana trees to shade the plants. Later -on we plant bucuara trees instead of the bananas, as -they are more hardy. If the coffee plants were not -shaded like that they might dry up.”</p> - -<p>“Do they bear at once?” questioned Darry.</p> - -<p>“Oh, no, far from it. They sometimes bear a -little the fourth or fifth year, but give nothing like a -regular crop until the seventh or eighth year.”</p> - -<p>“Gracious, what a time to wait!” murmured -Frank.</p> - -<p>“That is true, Newton,” said the professor. “But -after a plantation is once started it will last fifty -years or more.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_146">[146]</span>“One plantation here has lasted seventy-five -years,” said Juan Greva. “It yields 1,200 quintals -of coffee a season, and the plantation is worth $60,000 -of United States money.”</p> - -<p>“How much is a quintal?” came from Frank.</p> - -<p>“One hundred and twenty-five pounds,” answered -the professor. “1,200 quintals would be how much, -Newton?”</p> - -<p>“150,000 pounds, sir,” answered Frank, after a -short mental calculation.</p> - -<p>“Correct. Now, Robertson, at $15 per hundred -pounds, what is such a crop worth?”</p> - -<p>“The crop is worth $22,500,” answered Mark, -after another pause.</p> - -<p>“Gracious, there must be money in raising -coffee!” exclaimed Sam.</p> - -<p>“Do they get fifteen cents a pound for this?” -questioned Darry.</p> - -<p>“The market price at present is about sixteen -cents,” answered Juan Greva. “It runs from ten -cents to twenty-two cents.”</p> - -<p>“You must remember, boys, that what is received -for the coffee is not pure gain. The plants have to -be cared for constantly and there is much to do before<span class="pagenum" id="Page_147">[147]</span> -the bean is ready for the market. All such labor -has to be paid for.”</p> - -<p>From the nursery they walked to the coffee grove -itself, a long and broad field, laid out into squares, -with ditches of water flowing between. The plants -were set out in rows, with many banana and bucuara -trees between.</p> - -<p>“The coffee plants blossom in September,” said -the steward, as they walked through the field. “The -blossoms are something like orange blossoms, which -your ladies love to use at weddings. Then comes -the berry, which is something like a red cherry and -is picked in April and May. The picking is a great -time and men, women and children take part, each -with a basket on his or her back. A good picker -can pick berries enough in one day to make forty -to fifty pounds of coffee.”</p> - -<p>Going into one of the storehouses, the steward -brought out some of the half-dried berries and broke -them open. Inside rested the seed, two coffee beans -with the flat sides together and covered with a sticky -pulp.</p> - -<p>“Don’t look much like the beans we get,” said -Frank.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_148">[148]</span>“These beans have to be dried and the pulp must -be taken off,” said the professor.</p> - -<p>“How do they get the pulp off?” asked Mark.</p> - -<p>“The berry is first crushed and then the mass -is put through a machine which separates the pulp -from the seeds. Then the seeds, or beans, are washed -twice and dried, and come out as white as anyone -would wish.”</p> - -<p>“But our coffee isn’t white,” said Frank. “It’s -green—that is, before it is roasted.”</p> - -<p>“The whiteness is all on the skin of the bean, -which must be taken off before the coffee is ready -for market. Did you notice that large stone flooring -on the other side of this field? That is the drying -floor.” The professor turned to the steward. “How -long do you dry your coffee here?”</p> - -<p>“From six weeks to two months,” answered Juan -Greva. “The weather makes the time short or long. -Each day the coffee is spread out with rakes and at -night it is gathered in heaps and covered with heavy -cloth.”</p> - -<p>“What a lot of work for a cup of coffee!” murmured -Mark.</p> - -<p>“The work does not stop there,” said the steward -with a smile. “When the coffee is dry it goes into<span class="pagenum" id="Page_149">[149]</span> -a machine which takes off the shell and then into -another machine which blows it perfectly clean. After -that it goes to the sorting room, where the girls -separate the good beans from the bad and grade the -good into five grades.”</p> - -<p>“And then what?” came from Sam.</p> - -<p>“Then the coffee is placed in bags and sewed up—that -is, the coffee which goes to the United States -and England. When you get it, it is roasted and -ground.”</p> - -<p>“And then we take it and boil it, and strain it, -and put milk and sugar to it, and drink it down, -and that’s the end of it,” broke in Darry. “What -a lot to do just for one cup of coffee! I never -dreamed of such work before.”</p> - -<p>“There is something else that is done with coffee, -though not here,” said Professor Strong. “In -Brazil they often paint coffee black for the South -African market, and in other places coffee is polished -so that it shines like silver. Every country has its -peculiar taste and the dealer must do his best to suit -that taste or lose the trade.”</p> - -<p>After walking through the coffee grove, they -turned back to the warehouses, and Juan Greva explained -the various tools at hand for caring for the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_150">[150]</span> -plants. “The coffee bush is a hardy one, but must -be carefully watched if we wish to get the best results,” -he said. “It must have enough water but -not too much, and we must be careful of grubs and -worms.”</p> - -<p>It was now growing warm, and the whole party -was glad enough to retire to the shelter of a palm -grove behind the warehouses. On two sides of the -grove were long rows of fruit trees with bushes of -various kinds of berries growing between. They sat -down and a servant presently appeared with a pitcher -of iced lemonade and a platter of little cakes covered -with honey.</p> - -<p>“This looks like a land of plenty,” said Mark, -leaning back on a bench and taking a deep breath. -“How fresh and green everything is! It seems to -me a man ought to be able to make a living without -half trying.”</p> - -<p>“The trouble down here has been the constant -revolutions,” answered the professor. “Nothing -has been safe, and nobody felt like settling down to -steady work. But that will pass away in time, and -then South America will take a leap forward that -will astonish those living in the North.”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_151">[151]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XVI<br /> - -<small>DARRY’S WILD RIDE</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">Promptly</span> at four o’clock Enrique Morano returned -from the University. He found our friends -taking it easy in the patio, in hammocks which Juan -Greva had had strung there, under the giant palm.</p> - -<p>“That is right, take it comfortably,” he said, with -a smile. “I am glad to see it. It is so hard to get -the Yankees to rest a little. They want constantly -to be on the go—to do something—to keep their -brain at work. Here, in this warm climate, it would -kill a man to keep at such a pace.”</p> - -<p>“It does make one lazy,” returned Darry, as he -sat up. “But you won’t find me lazy when I get in -the saddle.”</p> - -<p>“Then you love to ride?”</p> - -<p>“He’s crazy for a horse,” put in Mark. “You -see, his father is a big cattle dealer from Chicago, -and Darry has been out on the ranches more than<span class="pagenum" id="Page_152">[152]</span> -once. I believe you once helped to break a bronco, -didn’t you, Darry?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“Then I will have to provide you with an animal -of spirit,” said Enrique Morano, with another smile. -“Very well, you shall have such a one.”</p> - -<p>“No, no, don’t give him a fiery, untamed steed, -Morano,” interrupted Professor Strong. “Remember -I am responsible for his well-being while we are -in Venezuela.”</p> - -<p>“But I don’t want an old—plug,” said Darry, -with a crestfallen look. “If the horse is broken -I’d like to ride him even if he has some ginger in -him. Father lets me ride what I please at home.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I’ll take a look at the horse first,” answered -Professor Strong, slowly. “As to ‘plugs,’ as you -term them, I don’t think our host keeps any such.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I didn’t mean to insinuate that he did,” said -Darry, hastily.</p> - -<p>They walked down to the long, low stable and -the head hostler brought forth a number of the -horses. Enrique Morano pointed out a big bay.</p> - -<p>“That is the fellow,” he said. “I can ride him, -but he may prove too much for you.”</p> - -<p>“Let me try him,” pleaded Darry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_153">[153]</span>The bay was saddled, and the youth leaped up, -whip in hand. The horse pranced about a bit but -soon set off at an easy gait. The step is called the -<i>trote de paseo</i>, and is natural to the steeds in all -upper South America.</p> - -<p>“Why he’s easy,” sang out the boy, after riding -up and down the horse yard and out to the highway -and back. “I am sure I won’t have a bit of trouble -with him.”</p> - -<p>“He rides with confidence and well,” observed -Enrique Morano. “He ought to have no trouble on -the road.”</p> - -<p>The matter was talked over, and finally Darry -was allowed to ride the bay horse, which rejoiced in -the name of <i>El Montero</i>—The Huntsman. The -others were quickly provided with steeds, and a little -later they left the plantation, Enrique Morano leading -the way on a favorite black.</p> - -<p>For a long distance the road was level and they -moved off in a close bunch. Every one of the party -had learned to ride years before, so there was no -delay on that score. Mark and Frank wanted to race, -but the professor would not hear of it.</p> - -<p>Presently they crossed a heavy stone bridge, bearing -this inscription:</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_154">[154]</span></p> - -<p class="center">THE ILLUSTRIOUS AMERICAN,<br /> -<span class="large">GENERAL ANTONIO GUZMAN BLANCO,</span><br /> -PRESIDENT OF THE REPUBLIC,<br /> -HAD THIS BRIDGE ERECTED FOR<br /> -THE PUBLIC GOOD.</p> - -<p>“What a funny inscription,” observed Sam, as -he stopped to read it aloud.</p> - -<p>“General Antonio Guzman Blanco doesn’t want -himself forgotten,” laughed Mark. “I have seen -a dozen monuments with his name on them, and at -least two dozen of his portraits.”</p> - -<p>“He was a great man in his day,” said Enrique -Morano, gravely. “A very great man. He made -many improvements, such as building schools and -libraries, making highways and waterworks, and -bringing order out of disorder. But it would have -been better had he not advertised himself quite so -extensively.”</p> - -<p>“That’s just it,” said Frank, and added, under -his breath to Darry: “You’d think he was trying -to advertise some special brand of Stomach Bitters, -wouldn’t you?” And Darry had to bite his lip to -keep from laughing outright.</p> - -<p>“There isn’t half left of President Guzman<span class="pagenum" id="Page_155">[155]</span> -Blanco’s monuments that there once was,” said Professor -Strong. “After his downfall, and after the -people became convinced that he was negotiating -with foreign powers against their good, they took -revenge by pulling down many of his statues, destroying -his portraits and renaming many of the -streets and parks christened in his honor. His fine -plantation was ruined, and even the State that bore -his name was re-named Miranda.”</p> - -<p>Across the bridge the road ascended a slight hill -and then passed through an avenue of tropical trees -beautiful beyond description. Birds were numerous -and their music added to the delight of the riders.</p> - -<p>“It’s like a bit of paradise!” said Sam, as he drew -rein, with Mark beside him. “Just look at that -scenery. Did you ever behold anything so beautiful? -See yonder waterfall, how it glistens in the -sunshine and how gracefully the vines fall over the -rocks beside it! What a spot for a painter!”</p> - -<p>The others had also halted, all but Darry, who was -secretly itching to “let the bay out,” as he told himself. -Now he saw his chance and away he went, -before either Professor Strong or Enrique Morano -noticed him. There was a turn a hundred yards -ahead, and this gained, Darry whipped up the bay<span class="pagenum" id="Page_156">[156]</span> -and away they went up the hill and down the opposite -side at a break-neck speed, the boy urging the -horse on at every step.</p> - -<p>“This is what I call riding! Whoop!” he called -out. “Get up there, Huntsman, get up, I say!”</p> - -<p>Soon he was out of sight and hearing of the others -and still tearing along at a gait which was truly astonishing. -But the bay acted well and he had small -difficulty in keeping his seat. Indeed, he thought the -riding even easier than some he had experienced -while in our own west.</p> - -<p>The downward slope of the hill left behind, Darry -found himself confronted by a fork of the road. -There was small time to decide and he took the -branch to the south, as that looked more traveled -than the other. But he had hardly gone a hundred -yards before he noticed that the highway was somewhat -cut up, as if some improvements were underway.</p> - -<p>A short distance further on he came across a gang -of native workmen, armed with picks, spades and -shovels. They were digging a trench beside the road -and some of them shouted to him as he rode past, but -he did not understand a word they said.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_157">[157]</span>“Can’t stop me to-day, thank you!” he shouted -back pleasantly, and urged on his steed as before.</p> - -<p>The road now made another turn, among a mass -of rocks and brushwood. Here it crossed a narrow -rocky stream, where the water ran swiftly. The -bridge was out of repair and the workmen were engaged -in putting up a permanent stone structure to -take its place.</p> - -<p>“Go back! Go back!” shouted a foreman of the -laborers, in Spanish. “Go back!” And he rushed -forward to stop Darry’s horse. But before he could -do so, the youth was past him and riding on the old -bridge, which sagged and trembled beneath the -sudden weight.</p> - -<p>“Gracious, this won’t do,” thought the boy, and -tried to get the horse over the bridge with all possible -speed.</p> - -<p>He had just reached the end when there came a -loud explosion, as terrifying as it was unexpected. -The workmen were engaged in blasting rocks which -stood in the way of the new bridge and had just set -off a charge of dynamite. They had tried to warn -him to go back, but he had not understood them.</p> - -<p>As the explosion came horse and rider were lifted<span class="pagenum" id="Page_158">[158]</span> -into the air for several feet and before they landed -again, each was struck by the shattered stone, which -flew in all directions. The bay came down on his -knees, throwing Darry over his head into the stream -beneath the bridge. Then with a wild plunge the -frightened steed went on, leaving the boy to his -fate.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_159">[159]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XVII<br /> - -<small>A TALK ABOUT BEASTS AND SNAKES</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Darry</span> has gone on ahead,” observed Mark, -looking down the road.</p> - -<p>“He’s off for a ride now!” cried Sam. “My, -see him go!”</p> - -<p>“He is foolish to ride so fast in this sun,” said -the professor, half angrily. “Darry, come back!”</p> - -<p>But the call did not reach the flying youth, and he -was soon out of sight. Scarcely had he disappeared -when Enrique Morano gave a start.</p> - -<p>“We must stop him,” he ejaculated. “We must -stop him before it is too late.”</p> - -<p>“Too late?” came from the others in alarm.</p> - -<p>“Yes, too late. Below here are two roads and -he may take the wrong one and go to the old bridge, -which is worn out and not safe.”</p> - -<p>“Come!” The word came from the professor and -without ado he urged his horse forward at twice the -speed they had formerly employed. Enrique Morano<span class="pagenum" id="Page_160">[160]</span> -rode beside him and the boys brought up closely in -the rear.</p> - -<p>About half the distance to the old bridge was covered -when the noise of the explosion reached their -ears. Professor Strong gazed inquiringly at his old -college friend.</p> - -<p>“What can that mean, Morano?”</p> - -<p>“They are working on the new bridge and are -blasting rocks there. I trust the workmen warned -the youth—if he took that road.”</p> - -<p>It was not long before they came upon the first -of the workmen and the civil engineer questioned -them.</p> - -<p>“Yes, he came this way,” said Enrique Morano, -to the professor. “One man says he must have been -right on the old bridge when the blast occurred.”</p> - -<p>“Pray heaven he is safe!” murmured Professor -Strong, his face paling slightly.</p> - -<p>When they reached the old bridge they found the -workmen running down to the water’s edge.</p> - -<p>“He is here!” cried the foreman, to Morano. -“His horse ran away and threw him. The blast was -too much for the beast.”</p> - -<p>“Where is the boy?” demanded the professor, -and having the direction pointed out to him, leaped<span class="pagenum" id="Page_161">[161]</span> -to the rocks and ran forward to the edge of the -stream.</p> - -<p>Darry lay on his back, partly in and partly out of -the water. His eyes were closed and he was motionless.</p> - -<p>“Poor boy, he looks as if he were dead!”</p> - -<p>“No, no, don’t say that Darry is dead!” cried -Frank, who had come up by this time. “Perhaps -he’s only unconscious.”</p> - -<p>No one replied to this, but all rushed boldly into -the stream. Soon they had raised the body up and -carried it to a patch of grass under a tree. The -professor got down on his knees to make an examination.</p> - -<p>“He is alive!” he murmured, after a painful -pause. “I believe he has only been stunned.”</p> - -<p>As he finished speaking Darry gave a shudder and -opened his eyes.</p> - -<p>“Whoa!” he murmured. “Whoa!” and then -closed his eyes and gave a shiver.</p> - -<p>“You are safe now, my boy,” said the professor. -“Take it easy. You are safe.”</p> - -<p>At last Darry opened his eyes again and gave a -gasp.</p> - -<p>“Wha—what does this mean?” he questioned,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_162">[162]</span> -slowly, and then put his hand to his side and gave a -groan.</p> - -<p>“Don’t you remember the explosion?” asked -Mark. “The horse must have thrown you.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, yes, I remember now. Is the—the horse -all right?”</p> - -<p>“Never mind the horse,” put in Enrique Morano. -“I sincerely trust you are not seriously injured.”</p> - -<p>“I’ve got a pain in my side, but I guess it won’t -amount to much,” answered Darry and attempted -to sit up. But the effort was too much and he sank -back again.</p> - -<p>“Rest as you are,” said the professor, kindly. -“We will get a carriage to take you back to the -plantation.”</p> - -<p>“To be sure. I will go for the carriage myself,” -said Enrique Morano, and leaping into the saddle -again he dashed down the highway with the best -speed his steed could attain.</p> - -<p>While Enrique Morano was gone Professor -Strong made an examination of Darry. As a hunter -and traveler he had had considerable experience in -caring for the wounded and he soon learned that no -bones were broken. The youth was simply bruised -and in a few days would be as well as ever.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_163">[163]</span>One of the workmen on the road had gone after -the runaway horse and now returned, leading the -bay, which was covered with foam and dust. The -steed trembled with excitement and pranced around -continuously.</p> - -<p>It was half an hour before Enrique Morano appeared, -driving the largest carriage of which his -plantation boasted. Into this Darry was lifted carefully -and Professor Strong rode beside him, to save -him as much as possible from being jounced around.</p> - -<p>“I have sent a servant for a doctor,” said the civil -engineer. “He will probably be at the house as soon -as ourselves,” and such proved to be a fact.</p> - -<p>By nightfall Darry found himself lying on a cool -and comfortable bed. A bruise on his head was -bound up in a white bandage and there was another -bandage over his hip. As the boy was naturally -strong and healthy the physician said that medicine -for him would be unnecessary.</p> - -<p>“I’m glad he didn’t make me take a big dose of -something nasty,” said Darry to Frank. “Some -doctors do that, you know, just to let you think -they are earning their fee,” and Frank had to smile -at this, it was so much like his chum’s way of looking -at things.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_164">[164]</span>Under the circumstances it was impossible for the -party to leave the plantation, and after some talk -Professor Strong decided to accept Enrique Morano’s -invitation to remain there until the following -Monday.</p> - -<p>“That will give Hockley a chance to see the coffee -plantation and learn how coffee is raised,” said the -professor. “I will go and bring him while you -boys remain with Crane.”</p> - -<p>“It’s queer Hockley hasn’t come along on his own -account,” said Mark. “His friends must be off by -this time.”</p> - -<p>“I know of no steamer sailing to-day,” put in -Enrique Morano, who stood near. “His friends -must be going on some sailing vessel.”</p> - -<p>“Have you a list of the sailings?” asked Professor -Strong, quickly.</p> - -<p>“Yes, in the newspaper of yesterday. Here it is.”</p> - -<p>The professor took the paper and read the list with -care. As Morano had said there was no sailing of -any steamer. The sailing vessels to leave were two -in number, one bound for Cape Town, South Africa -and the other bound for Rio Janeiro, Brazil.</p> - -<p>“I thought his friends were bound for Philadelphia,” -mused Professor Strong, and said no more.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_165">[165]</span> -But his eyes took on a speculative look as though he -feared Hockley had not told the exact truth in the -note which had been sent.</p> - -<p>Dinner that evening was quite an elaborate affair -and lasted fully an hour. When it was over, Enrique -Morano insisted upon going into town with the -professor.</p> - -<p>“I am certain you boys can amuse yourselves -while we are gone,” he said, to Mark and the others. -“Make yourselves at home. There are books and a -piano, and in the corner are several portfolios of -pictures to look over.”</p> - -<p>“All right, I guess we’ll put in the time pleasantly -enough,” was Mark’s answer, and soon the two -men were gone and the boys found themselves alone, -excepting for the servants that remained within call -to wait on them.</p> - -<p>The portfolios of pictures proved of great interest -to all but Darry, who soon fell into a sound sleep, -from which the others did not awaken him. In the -collection of pictures were views of the great Cathedral -at Caracas, the numerous Public Buildings, the -Botanical Gardens, the wonderful railroad bridges -around the mountains and over the valleys, the harbors -at La Guayra, the waterways leading to the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_166">[166]</span> -mighty Orinoco, and views of the great river itself, -showing the canyons to be found in certain localities -and the fierce rapids. The latter views interested -them most of all.</p> - -<p>“I’m just aching to get on that river,” said Frank. -“What fun we will have, hunting, fishing and camping -out! The cities are all well enough, but one gets -tired of them after awhile.”</p> - -<p>“We haven’t seen so very much of the cities yet,” -put in Sam.</p> - -<p>“We’ve done up Caracas, and that’s the main city. -And we stopped at La Guayra, which is as important -a seacoast town as they have.”</p> - -<p>“I’m with Frank on the river question,” said -Mark. “I hope I get a shot at some big game.”</p> - -<p>“The professor thinks there is no large game left -in Venezuela,” said Sam. “He said there were a -number of animals of the cat variety like the puma, -ounce and ocelot.”</p> - -<p>“I’ve heard there were jaguars here—in the big -forests.”</p> - -<p>“The professor said there might be some but they -were becoming very rare. You see, the people who -have immense herds of cattle on the <i>llanos</i>, or<span class="pagenum" id="Page_167">[167]</span> -prairies, have to protect their stock and so they have -hunted the wild beasts pretty thoroughly.”</p> - -<p>“I know other things they have, which we may -fall in with, and they are just as bad as big game and -maybe worse,” said Mark.</p> - -<p>“What are they?” asked Frank, with increased -interest.</p> - -<p>“Alligators, rattlesnakes and boa-constrictors.”</p> - -<p>“Ugh!” came from Sam, with a shiver. “Deliver -me from a boa-constrictor. I saw one once in -a menagerie. They fed it on live rabbits and the -sight was enough to make one sick.”</p> - -<p>“The professor says the rattlesnakes are more to -be feared than anything,” went on Mark. “He says -the alligators and the boa-constrictors generally -keep their distance, but the snakes strike you through -the tall grass before you can realize what is up. I -can tell you what, we’ll have to keep our eyes open -when we get down on the hunting ground.”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_168">[168]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XVIII<br /> - -<small>A BITTER DISCOVERY</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">Hockley</span> sat up on the bed and stared around him -in stupid bewilderment. For the moment he could -realize nothing but that he had a bursting headache -and felt wretched all over.</p> - -<p>“It was the drinking and smoking that did it,” he -thought and gave a low groan. “Oh, my head!”</p> - -<p>For several minutes he sat almost motionless, trying -to collect his senses. Then he gazed around the -room and at last realized that he was in the apartment -which Dan Markel had engaged.</p> - -<p>“Markel!” he called out. “Markel, where are -you?”</p> - -<p>Receiving no answer, he dragged himself to his -feet. He was all in a tremble and soon sank down -in a chair by the barred window. He saw that the -sun was up and that the street was alive with people.</p> - -<p>“It must be pretty late,” he muttered, and felt -for his watch to note the time. “Oh, I forgot. The -watch was stolen, and so was my roll of bills. This<span class="pagenum" id="Page_169">[169]</span> -is a pretty how-do-you-do, anyway. What will the -professor say when he hears of it? But I don’t -care—he ain’t my master, and I’m going to do as I -please.” He put his hand to his forehead. “Oh, -how everything spins!”</p> - -<p>There was a wash basin and some water handy -and the lad bathed himself, after which he felt -slightly better. As he was re-arranging his collar -and tie he began to wonder what had become of his -friend.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps he has gone to hunt up my watch and -money,” he thought. “Hope he gets them. Dad -will be awful mad over that watch, I know. He -cautioned me to be careful of it when he gave it to -me.”</p> - -<p>Hockley waited for quarter of an hour longer and -then, out of patience, rang for an attendant.</p> - -<p>“Where is Mr. Markel?” he asked. “See if you -can find him.”</p> - -<p>“<i>Si, señor</i>,” said the servant, who understood a -little English and was kept to wait on Americans.</p> - -<p>After the man was gone Hockley sat down by -the window again and gave himself up to his reflections. -They were far from pleasant.</p> - -<p>“That cock fight was a fizzle,” he muttered.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_170">[170]</span> -“Markel must take me for a fool to cart me off to -such a place. I’ve a good mind to tell him so, too, -when he comes. If he can’t take me to better places -than that I’ll cut him.”</p> - -<p>Hockley’s head continued to ache, and the quarter -of an hour he had to wait ere the servant returned -seemed an age to him.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Markel cannot be found, <i>señor</i>,” was the report. -“I have searched all over the place, but it is of -no use.”</p> - -<p>“He isn’t in the dining room?”</p> - -<p>“No <i>señor</i>.”</p> - -<p>“Did you see him go out?”</p> - -<p>“I did not, <i>señor</i>.”</p> - -<p>“He didn’t leave any word at the office?”</p> - -<p>“He did not, <i>señor</i>.”</p> - -<p>“It’s mighty queer what has become of him. I’ll -go out and look for him myself.”</p> - -<p>Leaving the apartment Hockley strolled into the -office and took a look up and down the hot street and -then into the wine-room. Of course he saw nothing -of the man from Baltimore, who was now miles -away. Much bewildered but still unsuspicious he -went back to the office.</p> - -<p>“He must have gone away shortly after you sent<span class="pagenum" id="Page_171">[171]</span> -for your bag,” said the hotel keeper, who also spoke -English.</p> - -<p>“After I sent for my bag?” repeated Hockley. -“I sent for no bag.”</p> - -<p>“No?” The hotel keeper looked astonished. -“He said you wished it, and we sent a boy after it. -He took it to your room.”</p> - -<p>“I haven’t seen the bag,” answered Hockley, and -then his heart sank suddenly within him, for he remembered -telling Markel of the secret compartment. -What if the man from Baltimore had played him -false?</p> - -<p>“The bag must be in your room,” went on the -hotel man stoutly. “I saw it carried in myself.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll go and look,” returned the lank youth and -almost ran back to the apartment. At first he failed -to locate the valise but presently discovered it under -the bed and hauled it forth.</p> - -<p>“Robbed! Every cent gone!” The cry came -straight from Hockley’s heart, and trembling from -head to foot he sank into a chair, the picture of -misery and despair.</p> - -<p>“You are robbed?” asked the hotel keeper, who -had followed him to the door.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_172">[172]</span>“Yes, robbed! That man has taken all of my -money.”</p> - -<p>“But he was your friend!” ejaculated the other, -in bewilderment.</p> - -<p>“He pretended to be my friend,” answered the -youth, bitterly. “I met him on the steamer from -New York. He was a stranger up to that time.”</p> - -<p>“And an American! It is very sad, <i>señor</i>. What -will you do? Put the police on his track?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know what to do. I’m strapped—I -haven’t a dollar to my name.”</p> - -<p>At this the brow of the hotel keeper darkened.</p> - -<p>“Who then will pay your bill?” he asked sharply.</p> - -<p>“My bill?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, <i>señor</i>. I am a poor man, for the hotel business -is not very good this year. I cannot afford to -lose what is coming to me.”</p> - -<p>“You’ll have to lose it!” cried Hockley, angrily. -“I’ve been duped, don’t you understand? Cleaned -out. How can I pay you?”</p> - -<p>“But you are with another party, at the big hotel. -They told me up there of it.”</p> - -<p>“That’s true, but I’m not going to pay Markel’s -bill, I can tell you that,” snorted Hockley.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_173">[173]</span>“If you do not pay I shall tell the police it is a -scheme to cheat me out of my money,” was the sullen -answer. “You have some baggage, that bag, I shall -hold it until I am paid. You shall not remove it.”</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/p172.jpg" alt="" /></div> -<p class="caption">“You have some baggage in that bag. I shall hold it.”</p> - -<p>At this Hockley was horrified, feeling that he was -getting deeper and deeper into difficulty.</p> - -<p>“Haven’t you any pity on a fellow who has been -cleaned out?” he pleaded.</p> - -<p>“I am a poor man—I must have my money,” returned -the hotel keeper, stoutly.</p> - -<p>“All right, you shall have it,” answered Hockley. -“But you’ll have to wait until I get back to the -other hotel and get the cash.”</p> - -<p>“I will go with you,” answered the hotel keeper, -who was unwilling to trust the youth out of his sight.</p> - -<p>Valise in hand Hockley tramped back to the hotel -at which our friends were stopping. He fully expected -to find Professor Strong and the others awaiting -him, and wondered what explanation he should -make concerning his plight.</p> - -<p>When he learned that all were at the plantation -still he did not know whether to be glad or sorry. -He hunted out the hotel clerk and asked concerning -the professor and the others.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_174">[174]</span>“I would like to borrow a little money until they -get back,” he said. “Professor Strong will make -it good when he settles up.”</p> - -<p>The money was at once forthcoming, and Hockley -settled up with the keeper of the Hotel Ziroda. He -would not pay for Markel, and the hotel man said he -would keep whatever had been left behind until the -bill was settled. But the man from Baltimore had -left little of value outside of a newspaper containing -some dirty linen.</p> - -<p>It was a very crestfallen youth who slipped into the -dining room for breakfast and one who was in a -humor to eat but little. As he gulped down a cup of -coffee Hockley meditated on the situation. He -wanted to smooth matters over with Professor -Strong but did not see his way clear to doing it.</p> - -<p>“I suppose I’ll have to face the music in the end,” -he thought, with a long sigh. “Oh, what a downright -fool I was, to be taken in so easily! If the -other fellows hear of it how they will laugh at me!”</p> - -<p>When Professor Strong arrived in the evening he -saw at once that something out of the ordinary had -occurred. Hockley sat in his room, his head tied up -in a towel.</p> - -<p>“What is the matter, Hockley?” he asked.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_175">[175]</span>“I’ve had bad luck, sir,” whined the youth. -“Awfully bad luck.”</p> - -<p>“Why, how is that?”</p> - -<p>“I fell in with that Dan Markel, sir—after I had -left those friends I mentioned in the note. Markel -is a villain. He induced me to go off with him last -night, and then he drugged and robbed me.”</p> - -<p>“Is it possible! I did not like the looks of the man -when first we met on the steamer. But I thought -we left him behind at Curaçao.”</p> - -<p>“He came on after us. He was a sly one, I can -tell you, sir. You know I said I wanted to see the -lumber yards, so that I could write to my father and -tell him how business was carried on here. Well, he -said he knew all about them and would show me -around. So I went with him after my friends sailed -and instead of showing me around he took me to -some kind of a hotel. I had some cocoa and it was -drugged and after that I didn’t know a thing until I -woke up at the Hotel Ziroda and found my watch -and money gone. And what was worse the villain -had sent for my valise and robbed that too.”</p> - -<p>This mixture of truth and falsehood was told very -adroitly, and Professor Strong could not but believe -the tale. He hurried to the other hotel and interviewed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_176">[176]</span> -the proprietor, and then notified the police -of what had occurred. An alarm was sent out and a -hunt made for Dan Markel, but the man from Baltimore -could not be found.</p> - -<p>Professor Strong wished to know something about -the friends Hockley had met, but the youth pretended -to be too sick to talk. He had been clever -enough to look over the sailings in the newspaper -and said they had gone on the <i>Desdemona</i> to Rio -Janeiro, and were going from that port to Philadelphia.</p> - -<p>As the youth seemed too sick to journey to the -plantation Professor Strong remained with him all -night, and Enrique Morano went back alone to carry -the news to the others.</p> - -<p>“Humph! we are having all sorts of excitement,” -was Mark’s comment. “First it was myself, then it -was Darry, and now it’s Hockley. I wonder what -will happen next?”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_177">[177]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIX<br /> - -<small>BATHING AT MACUTO</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">During</span> the time that Darry was ill, the others -took the railroad to Valencia and stopped half a day -in that ancient town, which is one of the most -picturesque in all of South America. They visited -Lake Valencia, lying far above sea level, and Enrique -Morano took them to a cathedral in the vicinity -where can be seen a number of rare religious paintings. -On the way back a stop was made at Victoria, -once the place where Bolivar lived and where a -great number of relics of the departed great man -are stored.</p> - -<p>Darry’s sickness did not last, and inside of five -days he announced that he would be able to go anywhere. -“But I shan’t try to run away again on a -horse,” he added, with a rueful smile.</p> - -<p>The boys had endeavored to question Hockley -about his experience with Dan Markel, but could -get no satisfaction. Once Hockley flew in a rage -at Sam over this.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_178">[178]</span>“It’s my business, not yours,” he growled. “I -lost the money and the watch. You only want to -crow over me, but let me tell you, if you go too far -somebody will get a thrashing.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t want to crow at all, Hockley,” returned -Sam. “I thought that perhaps I might be able to -help you—if this Markel ever shows himself -again.”</p> - -<p>“He won’t show himself—he’s too cute,” grumbled -the other. “Now you just keep quiet about it.” -And there the subject was dropped, so far as it -reached the injured one.</p> - -<p>“He’s sore, no doubt of that,” said Frank to Sam, -when told of the conversation. “And I don’t blame -him. Just the same, I’ll wager he went off with -Markel to have a good time.”</p> - -<p>“I think that too, Frank. Well, if he went too -far, he’s had to pay for it,” returned Sam.</p> - -<p>All told, the stay at the coffee plantation had been -full of interest and the boys thanked Enrique Morano -over and over again for his kindness to them.</p> - -<p>“If you ever come to New York we’ll do all we -can for you,” said Mark, heartily, and the others -spoke in a similar strain.</p> - -<p>The next day found them back to Caracas and here<span class="pagenum" id="Page_179">[179]</span> -they stopped but a few hours before taking a train -for La Guayra. Arriving at the seaport arrangements -were made for a side trip, so to speak, to the -Gulf and the Lake of Maracaibo, situated to the -westward. But the vessel was not to sail until two -days later, so while waiting they took a little run -over to Macuto, located not far from La Guayra.</p> - -<p>“Macuto is the Bar Harbor, Asbury Park, and -Coney Island of Venezuela,” explained the professor, -while the party was on the way, along a highway -skirting the ocean. “It is only six miles from -the seaport, and is a great resort for the folks in -Caracas and La Guayra who wish to escape the extreme -heat of those towns. It gets a constant breeze -from the north and as a consequence is usually ten to -fifteen degrees more on the side of comfort.”</p> - -<p>On arriving at Macuto the boys were somewhat -disappointed to find the greater part of the beach -highway given over to drinking places and general -stores, while the hotels were further up on the hills -behind the sand.</p> - -<p>“Can’t we go in bathing?” asked Sam. It was -a sport he enjoyed exceedingly.</p> - -<p>“Yes, there is a bathing spot, at the end of the -highway,” answered the professor, and thither they<span class="pagenum" id="Page_180">[180]</span> -made their way. The bathing pavilion was built in -the shape of a castle, standing in the water at the -end of a long wharf.</p> - -<p>The boys were soon inside, and each paid his -medio for a bathroom and the use of a towel. They -soon discovered that the men bathed in one place -and the women in another, and that but few suits -were used. But suits were to be had at an office -in a corner of the building and they procured these -and all went in, including the professor, who was an -excellent swimmer.</p> - -<p>“Tell you what, this is something like!” cried -Sam, enthusiastically, as he splashed about and then -scooped some water up over Frank’s head. “Come -on, I’ll race you!”</p> - -<p>“Done!” answered Frank, who was also a good -swimmer, and in another moment the two lads were -off, while a crowd, composed largely of natives, -watched them.</p> - -<p>There was not much danger, as the bathing spot -is enclosed by rows of piling, over which the surf -booms constantly. The water was warm and clean. -The race was to the stone wall which divides the -men’s space from that of the women’s and both -reached the goal at the same time.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_181">[181]</span>“A tie!” shouted Mark. “Better call it off,” -and they did and went in for diving and plunging -and “horse play” to their heart’s content. Even -Hockley seemed to thaw out over the fun and joined -in as readily as anybody.</p> - -<p>After the bath the entire party paid a visit to -several of the leading hotels, stopping at one for a -shell-fish dinner which was as delicious as any they -had ever eaten. At the hotel was a native orchestra -playing operatic airs and popular songs. Seeing the -Americans the leader started his men to playing what -was then the popular song in New York. This -pleased Mark and Frank, and when a collection was -taken they did not forget to contribute.</p> - -<p>“By Jove!” cried Hockley, as they were on the -point of leaving the hotel. “It’s him!”</p> - -<p>“Him? Who?” asked Mark, who stood beside -the lank youth.</p> - -<p>“Dan Markel. He just went into that store over -yonder!”</p> - -<p>“Then you had better tell the professor and have -him arrested.”</p> - -<p>“I will.”</p> - -<p>Professor Strong was just settling their bill when -Hockley acquainted him with what he had seen.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_182">[182]</span>“To be sure, we must catch him,” he cried. -“Lead the way.”</p> - -<p>Hockley set off on a run, with the professor beside -him, and the others bringing up the rear. Markel -had entered a <i>bodega</i>, or grocery, which were -numerous in that particular vicinity.</p> - -<p>Markel was buying something in the shop when, -on glancing up, he saw Hockley rush in, followed -by Professor Strong and the others. They all made -directly for the fellow, who found himself surrounded -almost before he realized it.</p> - -<p>“Give me my watch and that money,” ejaculated -Hockley, in quick rage, and caught the man from -Baltimore by the sleeve.</p> - -<p>“Hullo, what’s the matter?” demanded the man, -trying to put on a bold front.</p> - -<p>“I’ll show you what’s the matter,” blustered -Hockley. “Give me the watch and money I say.”</p> - -<p>“You must be crazy. I haven’t anything belonging -to you.”</p> - -<p>“And I say you have.”</p> - -<p>“Hockley says that you robbed him while he was -in your company last week,” put in Professor -Strong. “I think you had better come with us to the -police station.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_183">[183]</span>“The boy doesn’t tell the truth. He drank too -much and got in a crowd, and when he came out his -money and watch were gone. I had nothing to do -with it.”</p> - -<p>“I say it’s not so,” ejaculated Hockley, growing -red at being exposed. “You sent for my valise and -robbed that, too. I can prove you sent for it by the -proprietor of the Hotel Ziroda.”</p> - -<p>At this shot Dan Markel grew pale. He felt that -he was cornered and that a visit to the police station -would do much to prove his guilt. He had left the -watch behind him, but he had Hockley’s money—or -the larger portion of it—on his person, and he did -not know but that some of the bills could be identified.</p> - -<p>“It—it’s all a mistake,” he faltered.</p> - -<p>“You come to the police station with us,” said -Professor Strong, quietly but sternly.</p> - -<p>Dan Markel looked around. There seemed no -way of escape and his face fell.</p> - -<p>“All right, I’ll go with you,” he said, although -he had no such intention. “But let me tell you that -you are making a big mistake, and that you’ll have a -suit for damages on your hands.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll risk the suit,” returned the professor, grimly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_184">[184]</span>All marched out of the <i>bodega</i>, much to the astonishment -of the proprietor, who had not understood a -word of what was said. On the corner they paused.</p> - -<p>“There ought to be a policeman somewhere——” -began Professor Strong, when without warning, -Dan Markel tore himself loose and leaped into the -street. Several carriages were passing and in a -twinkling he had darted between these and was -running for an alleyway not far distant.</p> - -<p>“He’s running away!” burst out Hockley. -“Come on after him!” And he started to follow, -and so did the others. But the street was so crowded -that it took several seconds to gain the other side, -and by that time Markel was out of sight.</p> - -<p>“I saw where he went,” said Mark. “Into the -alley way. Come on, Hockley.”</p> - -<p>“I’m with you,” was the answer, and both boys -hurried on as fast as the condition of the thoroughfare -would permit.</p> - -<p>Dan Markel was thoroughly alarmed, for he felt -that if he was captured Professor Strong would see -to it that he was given a long term of imprisonment.</p> - -<p>“They shan’t get me this trip,” he muttered to -himself, and seeing a doorway open close at hand, -darted through this, into a large warehouse. From<span class="pagenum" id="Page_185">[185]</span> -the entrance he made his way among a number of -boxes and barrels to the rear. Beyond was another -alleyway and he leaped into this. With all the speed -left to him he managed in a few minutes to gain -the boulevard where the carriages ran between Macuto -and La Guayra. A vehicle containing only a -couple of passengers was passing and he leaped into -this.</p> - -<p>“I wish to get to La Guayra as soon as possible,” -he said to the driver. “An extra bolivar for you if -you whip up your horses.”</p> - -<p>“<i>Si, señor</i>,” was the answer, and the driver -cracked his whip. Away went the turnout; and that -was the last seen of Dan Markel for some time to -come.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_186">[186]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XX<br /> - -<small>A SHORT VOYAGE WESTWARD</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">Two</span> days later found our friends on board a -steamer bound for the Gulf of Maracaibo. The -weather was all that could be desired, and for the -most part all were in excellent spirits, the single -exception being Hockley, who still mourned the loss -of his money and timepiece.</p> - -<p>“It’s a shame we didn’t catch Dan Markel in Macuto,” -said the lank youth more than once. “I think -we might have done it if the professor hadn’t been -so slow to act.”</p> - -<p>“We did all we could,” had been Mark’s answer. -“But that Markel is a mighty slick one, and we’ll -have to get up bright and early to corner him.”</p> - -<p>Although the others did not know it, Professor -Strong had given Hockley a severe lecture on the -return to La Guayra, telling the youth of the folly -of associating with a man of Markel’s character, -and of the further foolishness of drinking and trying -to be a so-called sport.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_187">[187]</span>“You will ruin both your health and your character -by such actions,” the professor had said. “A -young man who will act in that fashion shows a lack -of common sense. I want no more of it.” And -though Hockley had felt strongly inclined to “talk -back” he had not had the courage to do so.</p> - -<p>The steamer sailing from La Guayra to the Gulf -of Maracaibo made a stop at Curaçao, so that little -could be seen of the coast line between La Guayra -and Cape St. Roman, at the entrance to the gulf. The -stop at Willemstad was of short duration and nobody -of the party went ashore. Then the course -was straight around the cape into the gulf, which -is nothing less than an inlet of the Caribbean Sea, -seventy-five miles deep and about twice as broad.</p> - -<p>The Gulf and the Lake of Maracaibo are connected -by an irregular strait twenty miles long and -five to ten miles wide. The lake itself is a hundred -miles long and three quarters that in width. It is -very deep, so that large vessels can sail on it almost -from end to end. But big vessels cannot get in or -out because the strait is shallow and filled with -shifting bars of sand.</p> - -<p>“What a picturesque spot,” was Sam’s comment, -as the steamer made her landing at Maracaibo, which<span class="pagenum" id="Page_188">[188]</span> -is situated upon the strait. “And it looks as if they -did a big business here.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, a very large business is done here,” answered -Professor Strong. “They export millions -of pounds of coffee and cocoa each year, besides -hides, cotton, and other articles of commerce.”</p> - -<p>They were soon ashore and took a trip on the -street railways, which stretch a dozen miles or more -in various directions. On every side was the greatest -of activity, the wharves being as full of life as those -at New York city. There were electric lights and -telephones the same as at Caracas.</p> - -<p>“They are up-to-date, that’s sure,” said Mark. -“Anybody who comes down here expecting to find -a howling wilderness will have his eyes opened.”</p> - -<p>“The country would progress even more rapidly -were it not for many things beyond human control,” -returned the professor. “But the heat is at times -terrific and the fever lays many low, and then they -have had some awful earthquakes and tidal waves -here.”</p> - -<p>After the ride the party visited various public -buildings and public parks, with their statues of -Bolivar, Guzman Blanco and other celebrities.</p> - -<p>“We are now in the State of Zulia,” said Professor<span class="pagenum" id="Page_189">[189]</span> -Strong, “and not over ninety miles from the -eastern boundary of Colombia. This State contains -about 100,000 inhabitants, of which 30,000 live in -this city. A good deal of the trade you see here -comes over the mountains from Colombia on mule back. -Several railroads are contemplated, and when -they are built Maracaibo will be one of the most important -points for shipping in the northern part of -South America.”</p> - -<p>The party stopped for two days at Maracaibo, -visiting several towns in the vicinity, which, however, -were of small importance. On the second day -Frank proposed that they hire one of the native -boats for a short sail on the lake.</p> - -<p>“Just so we can tell the folks at home that we -sailed on Lake Maracaibo,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah, just the thing!” cried Sam. “I’d like -that first rate.”</p> - -<p>The others were equally enthusiastic, and soon -a boat was procured, something similar to a sloop, -but with the sail running directly to the masthead. -A native was in charge who could speak a little -English, and he agreed to take them down the lake -for a distance of a dozen miles and bring them back -early in the evening.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_190">[190]</span>With a basket filled with good things procured at -their hotel, the party embarked at one of the long, -low piers, and soon the mainsail was set and they -were speeding away over the clear waters of the -lake at a rate of seven knots an hour. The craft was -a staunch built affair and minded her helm to perfection.</p> - -<p>“I see you know how to handle her,” said Mark, -to the boatman, who rejoiced in the name of Salvador.</p> - -<p>“<i>Si, señor,</i>” was the answer. “I been a boatman -since a little baby so big,” and Salvador smiled -broadly.</p> - -<p>“What do you do with the boat, fish?”</p> - -<p>“Fish when weather good, <i>señor</i>. When weather -no good carry cocoa and t’ings, or go to sleep.”</p> - -<p>“Go to sleep is good,” laughed Frank. “That’s -one thing everybody down here seems able to do.”</p> - -<p>Mark and Frank had purchased some fishing -tackle in the town and as they sailed they threw out -lines behind for trolling. Salvador showed them -how to bait up to the best advantage and soon Mark -found he had a bite. He hauled in without delay -and brought on deck a bass weighing all of a pound -and a half.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_191">[191]</span>“First haul!” he shouted, highly pleased.</p> - -<p>“Here is another,” cried Frank, and brought in -an equally big fish. All examined the catches with -care but saw little difference from the fish caught -nearer home.</p> - -<p>“Any electric eels here?” asked the professor of -the boatman.</p> - -<p>“I have heard of a few but I never see them, -<i>señor</i>.”</p> - -<p>“Electric eels?” repeated Hockley. “Do they -come from Venezuela?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, we’ll find them in the Orinoco, Hockley,—big -ones too. We will have to be careful when we -go fishing there, unless we want to get a shock.”</p> - -<p>“Pooh! I’m not afraid of an eel,” returned the -other. “I saw an electric eel once, in an aquarium -at Chicago, but he didn’t have much electricity in -him.”</p> - -<p>“Then he must have been almost exhausted. A -strong healthy electric eel can give a man as much -of a shock as anybody wants, I can assure -you.”</p> - -<p>Inside of two hours the boys had a string of ten -good sized fish, and then the professor told them -they had better stop the sport as it delayed the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_192">[192]</span> -progress of the boat. So the lines were hauled in, -after which they progressed faster than ever. A -stiff breeze was blowing and the sky was cloudless.</p> - -<p>“We couldn’t have a nicer day for this trip,” said -Darry, and all agreed with him.</p> - -<p>Salvador knew of a beautiful grove on the shore -of the lake, and to this he directed their course. -There was a little stretch of sand, backed up by a -grove of stately palms, and behind this some rocks -and a waterfall.</p> - -<p>“Oh, if only I had my camera,” sighed Sam. -He had brought along a photographic outfit but unfortunately -had left it at the hotel. The rocks and -the waterfall looked very inviting, and they took -their dinner in sight of the place but under the palms, -for the sun was hot in spite of the breeze.</p> - -<p>After the meal some of the boys stretched out for -a rest. Sam wished to go swimming but at this the -native boatman shook his head.</p> - -<p>“No go here,” said Salvador. “Go in water, -maybe git bit by crab. Bad crab here.”</p> - -<p>“Crabs?” said Sam. “I haven’t seen any.”</p> - -<p>“Me show you,” returned the boatman and led -the way along the sand. Procuring a sharp stick,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_193">[193]</span> -he walked along until he came to a round hole close -to the water’s edge. He thrust the stick into the -hole. Instantly came a scattering of sand and an -ugly looking brown crab came into view, hissing -viciously and with his eyes bulging from their sockets. -Sam sprang back to get out of harm’s way -but the crab leaped into the lake and sank from -sight.</p> - -<p>“What an ugly beast!”</p> - -<p>“Him more ugly if you stick toe in his hole,” -grinned Salvador. “Maybe him bite toe off.”</p> - -<p>“I believe you,” and Sam gave a shudder. “A -nice beach for swimming truly!”</p> - -<p>“The land crabs of South America are all more -or less dangerous,” said Professor Strong, who had -watched proceedings from a distance. “Some of -them are poisonous and all will give you a nasty -bite if they get the chance. You must never bathe -unless you feel certain there is nothing around to -harm you.”</p> - -<p>It was not until half an hour later that they prepared -to leave the spot. Some clouds had come up -and Salvador said he was afraid they might be in -for a blow before nightfall.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_194">[194]</span>“I wouldn’t mind a little wind, just for the excitement,” -said Frank.</p> - -<p>“Yes, but we don’t want too much,” returned the -professor. “They are as liable to have squalls on -Lake Maracaibo as they are on any of our great -lakes at home.”</p> - -<p>“Do you think we’ll get a squall?” cried Hockley, -in something of alarm.</p> - -<p>“I trust not, Hockley. If it blows too heavily -we’ll have to run in shore somewhere until it is -over.”</p> - -<p>They were soon aboard the boat, the mainsail -was hoisted, and away they ran, in the direction of -the town. The wind was so fresh that the spray -flew in all directions so that it was impossible to -find a dry spot. Hockley grumbled at this, but -there seemed no help for it.</p> - -<p>“As it is warm it won’t hurt you,” said Professor -Strong. “As soon as we reach the hotel I will see -to it that all have dry clothing.”</p> - -<p>An hour later found them out of sight of land -and bowling along as swiftly as ever. The sky was -now growing darker, the sun having gone behind a -heavy bank of clouds. Presently the wind died out -completely, leaving the sail flapping idly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_195">[195]</span>“We’re getting a calm instead of a storm,” said -Frank. “And just as we were making such good -time, too!”</p> - -<p>“It’s the calm before the storm, Newton,” answered -Professor Strong. “We’ll get more wind -than we want in half an hour.”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_196">[196]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXI<br /> - -<small>THE SQUALL ON LAKE MARACAIBO</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">What</span> Professor Strong said proved to be true. -In less than half an hour they saw the whitecaps -forming on the lake behind them. The wind came -and went in fitful gusts, and then of a sudden came -a blow that was little short of a hurricane.</p> - -<p>“We’re going to catch it now!” shouted Mark. -“Just hear how it whistles!”</p> - -<p>“Hold fast, all of you!” came from Professor -Strong.</p> - -<p>“We are holding fast,” answered Darry, who -was clinging to the stern sheets with might and -main.</p> - -<p>The sail had long since been taken in and Salvador -stood at his rudder, doing his best to keep the -craft up to the wind. But this was no easy task -for the wind was veering around rapidly.</p> - -<p>“Gracious, it’s down on us for keeps!” shouted -Frank, a moment later. “Look at that!”</p> - -<p>He bobbed his head forward and looking the other<span class="pagenum" id="Page_197">[197]</span> -boys made out a low wall of white foam moving on -them with incredible swiftness. There was a strange -humming in the air and the sky became blacker than -ever.</p> - -<p>In a twinkling the squall was on them in all its -fury, sending the sloop headlong into the foam. -The boys could see nothing and held their breath in -awful suspense. Hockley fairly shivered with terror, -but none of the others noted this, being too busy -caring for their own safety.</p> - -<p>As the sloop veered around, the boiling foam -mounted to the forward deck and Sam was caught -as in the breakers of the ocean. He was clinging -to a low guard, unaware that the thing was partly -rotted away. Without warning came a cracking -and before he realized it he was over the side.</p> - -<p>Down and down, and still down went poor Sam, -until he felt that he must be going straight to the -bottom of the lake. He was so bewildered that for -several seconds he scarcely knew what to do. He -turned over and over and clutched out wildly, reaching -nothing but the water, which, at this distance -below the surface, was as calm as ever.</p> - -<p>At last the youth struck out for the surface. He -wanted to breathe but knew that if he opened his<span class="pagenum" id="Page_198">[198]</span> -mouth and took in the water it might prove fatal to -him. His head began to grow dizzy and a strange -pain shot across his chest. Then he came up, opened -his eyes and gave a gasp.</p> - -<p>“I went overboard,” was his thought. “Where -can the sloop be?”</p> - -<p>He tried to call out, but his puny effort was -drowned completely by the wind, which whistled as -fiercely as ever. On every side of him the water -boiled and foamed as before and he was thrown -around like a cork, often turning over and going -beneath the surface.</p> - -<p>The next few minutes were to the boy little short -of an age. He strained his eyes for some sign of -the sloop but could see absolutely nothing of the -vessel. He was alone on the broad bosom of Lake -Maracaibo!</p> - -<p>Alone! It was an awful thought and as it flashed -over his mind he felt his heart sink like a lump of -lead in his bosom. Alone! Would they come -back for him, or would he be left there to drown?</p> - -<p>“They ought to come back,” he muttered. -“They <i>must</i> come back! Oh, God spare me!” -And the prayer was repeated over and over again.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_199">[199]</span> -It gave him strength, and he struck out as best he -could, determined to keep afloat as long as possible.</p> - -<p>All told the squall did not last over twenty minutes, -but to poor Sam it seemed an age. He made -scant progress through the milklike foam, but this -did not matter, since he knew not in what direction -he was heading.</p> - -<p>“I may be going away from the sloop and away -from land too,” he thought dismally. “But I’ve -got to do something,” and he continued to swim.</p> - -<p>His strength was nearly gone when he bumped -into something hard. Laying hold of the object he -found it was a spar, which, from its general appearance, -had been in the water for many months. He -clasped the spar tightly and this sustained him without -further aid.</p> - -<p>The gusts of wind had been followed by a heavy -downpour of rain and this continued for all of half -an hour. It was still dark and Sam could not make -out in what direction he was drifting. At last, however, -he saw a dim outline of land ahead and did his -best to shove the spar in that direction. His feet -touched bottom, and more dead than alive he -dragged himself out of the lake and flung himself<span class="pagenum" id="Page_200">[200]</span> -headlong in some rank grass under a clump of wild -plantains.</p> - -<p>When Sam sat up he found the storm going down -and the setting sun trying to break through the -clouds. The rain had ceased and the bosom of the -lake, while still covered with whitecaps, was gradually -resuming its normal condition.</p> - -<p>“What an experience!” he murmured, as he -looked out upon the water. “Wonder if the sloop -weathered it or went to the bottom? Oh, if only -all the rest are safe!”</p> - -<p>He arose to his feet but found himself so weak -that he was glad enough to rest again. He was on -a bit of an island for behind him was a wide ditch -which separated the patch from the mainland. In -the distance was a hill backed up by a lofty mountain. -Not a human being nor a habitation of any -sort was in sight.</p> - -<p>“I’m alone and no mistake,” he mused. “I wonder -how I had best strike out? Let me see, by the -way the sun lies I must be on the eastern shore of -the lake and if that’s so I’m opposite to the strait -where the town is situated. I’m sure I can’t see -how I’m going to get back to Maracaibo.”</p> - -<p>Before Sam could make up his mind how to move<span class="pagenum" id="Page_201">[201]</span> -darkness was upon him—the darkness of the tropics, -which descends without warning. At this he sprang -up in added alarm.</p> - -<p>“I can’t remain here all night,” he thought. “At -least I don’t want to. The place may be full of -snakes and those uncanny land crabs. I must get -up on higher ground if nothing else.”</p> - -<p>He set out for the hill he had noticed, but before -he had gone a hundred yards, found himself in the -mire surrounding the ditch.</p> - -<p>“This won’t do,” he muttered and started to go -back, but only ended by getting in deeper until he -was up to his knees. He was now thoroughly -alarmed and came to a standstill almost in despair.</p> - -<p>Had it been light Sam might have seen that not -far away was a firm stretch of ground leading up to -the hill. But he could not see this and so deemed it -best to get back to where he had first landed.</p> - -<p>Retracing his steps was not easy and once he fell, -covering his arms and breast with mud. When he -did get back to the wild plantains he was a sight to -behold and it took him some time to regain his wind.</p> - -<p>“I’m a prisoner on this bit of marshland—that’s -all there is to it,” he mused, as he flung himself -down near the edge of the lake. “I suppose I’ve<span class="pagenum" id="Page_202">[202]</span> -got to make the best of it until morning. But how -am I going to pass the night?”</p> - -<p>At the risk of stirring up some of the dreaded -crabs, he waded into the lake and washed himself -of the mud. Then he wrung out his jacket and -hung it up to dry. Fortunately it was a hot night, -so there was no danger of catching cold.</p> - -<p>The squall had driven away a good many of the -mosquitoes, which infest Lake Maracaibo almost -as numerously as they do Staten Island, but now the -little pests began to return and presently Sam found -himself kept busy by them and also by a species of -gnats which are equally annoying. To save himself -from their bites he tied his wet handkerchief -over his head and neck.</p> - -<p>In planning for the trip Mark had mentioned how -handy it would be for each to take along a waterproof -match-safe and Sam had provided himself -with one of these. Satisfied that he would have to -remain where he was for some hours at the least, -he hunted around for some dry grass and plantain -leaves and proceeded to build himself a smudge fire. -This burnt slowly because of the dampness and the -thick smoke soon put the most of the gnats and -mosquitoes to flight.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_203">[203]</span>The fire, dim as it was, gave an air of cheerfulness -to the spot, and Sam felt much better as he -watched it glow up and then droop. He did not -let it go out, but kept piling on the grass, which he -tore up in clods with ease. This grass is of the -wire variety, very strong, and is much used by the -natives in making baskets and various household -articles.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/p202.jpg" alt="" /></div> -<p class="caption">“I heard something, what was it?”</p> - -<p>It must have been close to midnight when Sam -fell into a doze, being so worn out he could scarcely -hold up his head. He had piled the fire as high as -possible and his only danger was that the smoke -might veer around and choke him to death.</p> - -<p>How long he dozed he could not tell exactly, -afterward, nor could he tell what awoke him. But -he opened his eyes with a start and was on his feet -almost before he was aware.</p> - -<p>“I heard something,” he told himself. “What -was it?”</p> - -<p>He listened but only a faint breeze blowing -through the grass and wild plantains reached his -ears. He strained his eyes, yet only the total darkness -met his gaze.</p> - -<p>Much alarmed Sam continued to stand on guard. -He had cut himself the stalk of a young plantain<span class="pagenum" id="Page_204">[204]</span> -with his jack-knife and he held this in his hands, at -the same time keeping as close to the fire as possible, -knowing that all wild beasts dread anything -burning.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_205">[205]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXII<br /> - -<small>PORT OF THE HAIR</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Where</span> is Sam?”</p> - -<p>Such was the question which came from Mark, -after the worst of the blow was over.</p> - -<p>“Samuel?” queried Professor Strong, quickly. -“Isn’t he at the bow?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir.”</p> - -<p>“He must have gone overboard!” ejaculated -Darry. “Sam! Sam! where are you?”</p> - -<p>“He did go overboard,” panted Hockley, who -had just been clearing his mouth of lake water. “I -saw him go.”</p> - -<p>“Then why didn’t you give the alarm?” demanded -the professor indignantly. “How long ago -was this?”</p> - -<p>“Only half a minute, sir. I would have spoken -before, but that last wave almost drowned me.”</p> - -<p>“Sam! Sam!” called the others in concert, and -listened attentively for an answer. When none came -they looked at each other in increasing alarm.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_206">[206]</span>“Did you see the boy go overboard?” asked the -professor of the native boatman.</p> - -<p>Salvador shook his head. “See noddings,” he -said. “I do best to keep boat from turning up, -<i>señor</i>.”</p> - -<p>“We must turn back for him,” went on Professor -Strong.</p> - -<p>“Turn back, <i>señor</i>? Dat is dangerous,” and the -native shook his head.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps, but we must go back, nevertheless. -Here, I will help you bring her around. Boys, -watch for him, two to the right and two to the left. -We must find and save him.”</p> - -<p>“Yes! yes!” said Frank. “Poor Sam! What -would his mother say if he was drowned!”</p> - -<p>The sloop came around with difficulty and for the -moment threatened to swamp herself. As the water -rolled up, Hockley gave a groan of terror.</p> - -<p>“Don’t, please don’t!” he whined. “We’ll all -go to the bottom next. Head her for land!”</p> - -<p>“Cling fast and you will be safe,” answered Professor -Strong, who was as cool as ever, although -deeply concerned over Sam’s welfare.</p> - -<p>“But we’ll go down—I know we will,” pleaded -the lank youth.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_207">[207]</span>“We are bound to save Sam, so shut up,” cried -Mark, getting angry. “Sam may be nothing to you -but he is a good deal to us,” and thereupon Hockley -became silent, although he shivered with fear every -time the sloop made an extra heavy lurch.</p> - -<p>In the midst of the wind and rain it was hard to -follow the back course correctly and without knowing -it they passed far to the westward of where Sam -had gone overboard.</p> - -<p>“I can’t see a thing,” remarked Mark, after a -painful silence lasting nearly quarter of an hour.</p> - -<p>“Nor I,” returned Frank.</p> - -<p>“It’s raining too hard to see much,” came from -Darry.</p> - -<p>“It is gradually letting up,” said the professor. -“And he must be somewhere in this neighborhood.”</p> - -<p>They continued to cruise around until the sun -went down, much to Hockley’s disgust.</p> - -<p>“It’s no use,” said the lank youth. “He’s gone -to the bottom and that’s all there is to it.”</p> - -<p>“You ought to be ashamed of yourself to speak -so, Jake Hockley!” retorted Mark. “Haven’t you -any heart?”</p> - -<p>“Of course I have, Mark Robertson, but I know a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_208">[208]</span> -thing or two. If he was afloat we’d have found him -long ago.”</p> - -<p>“We will continue the search if it takes all night,” -came from the professor. “I cannot believe that -poor Winthrop is drowned.”</p> - -<p>“Poor Beans” murmured Darry, and the tears -started to his eyes. “Such a good chap as he was!” -And he felt almost like hurling Hockley overboard -because of his heartlessness.</p> - -<p>Upon questioning Salvador, the professor learned -that there was a long stretch of marshland not a -great way off and that it was possible that Sam had -found his way in that direction.</p> - -<p>“It is a mile, <i>señor</i>. He would have to be a very -good swimmer to reach it,” said the boatman.</p> - -<p>“We’ll sail over to it anyway,” answered Professor -Strong. “We must do something.”</p> - -<p>The course of the sloop was changed and they -moved slowly for the marshland, beating against -the wind. Darry was at the bow watching eagerly -for any sign of life which might appear.</p> - -<p>“I see something in the water, dead ahead,” he -sang out presently and all rushed forward to investigate. -At first they felt sure it must be Sam’s body<span class="pagenum" id="Page_209">[209]</span> -but as they drew closer found it was nothing but a -mass of seaweed with some rubbish on top.</p> - -<p>“Too bad!” came from Hockley. “I thought the -search was ended.”</p> - -<p>“I’m glad we didn’t find him drowned,” answered -Frank.</p> - -<p>They were interrupted by a cry from the professor. -“I see a light ahead, low down as if on the water’s -edge. It looks like a signal.”</p> - -<p>“It must be a signal,” said the native boatman. -“No house dare—no people live dare. All wet -ground and mud, <i>señor</i>.”</p> - -<p>As they drew closer to the fire the professor let -out a long and loud cry:</p> - -<p>“Winthrop! Sam Winthrop! Is that you?”</p> - -<p>No answer came back and once again the boys felt -a keen disappointment. But the course of the sloop -was not changed and soon they were so close to the -fire that they could see around it quite plainly.</p> - -<p>“Somebody is there,” ejaculated Mark.</p> - -<p>“Yes, and it’s either Sam or his ghost,” added -Frank. “Hullo, Beans!” he yelled, at the top of -his lungs.</p> - -<p>The figure at the fire, which had been watching<span class="pagenum" id="Page_210">[210]</span> -landward, with club upraised, turned suddenly and -peered into the darkness of the lake.</p> - -<p>“Who calls?”</p> - -<p>“Beans, true enough!” came from Mark.</p> - -<p>“Are you safe, Winthrop?” asked the professor, -and then the sloop came up, ramming her bow deeply -in the mud of the bank. In another moment the -crowd was surrounding Sam and the boys were -hugging him warmly.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I’m safe,” answered Sam, when he felt able -to speak. “I—I went to sleep and woke up thinking -some wild animal was going to attack me. I’ve -had a pretty hard time of it, I can tell you.”</p> - -<p>“We’ve all had a hard time,” grumbled Hockley. -“We’ve been looking for you for hours.”</p> - -<p>“When I went overboard I thought I’d be -drowned sure,” went on Sam, and then he related -his story from beginning to end. “I can tell you, I -want no more Lake Maracaibo squalls.”</p> - -<p>“Nor do we,” came from Mark. “It was worse -than the one I once experienced on Lake George,—when -our yacht, the Firefly, was dashed on the -rocks and ruined.”</p> - -<p>“Let us all be truly thankful for Winthrop’s escape,” -put in the professor. “It was the act of an<span class="pagenum" id="Page_211">[211]</span> -all-wise and all-powerful Providence that has spared -him.”</p> - -<p>The little party remained around the fire for quite -a while, talking of the storm and drying their clothing. -Then the blaze was kicked into the water and -they boarded the sloop once more.</p> - -<p>“Are you quite sure we won’t have any more -squalls?” asked Sam, of the native boatman.</p> - -<p>“Storm gone now—no come back to-night,” answered -Salvador.</p> - -<p>Once aboard of the sloop the course was straight -for Maracaibo. But the wind had gone down and it -was not until after sunrise that they ran into the -harbor and landed.</p> - -<p>“Well, I guess you won’t forget Lake Maracaibo -in a hurry,” said Mark to Sam, as they walked to -their hotel.</p> - -<p>“You’re right I won’t,” was the reply. “One -such adventure is enough in a lifetime.”</p> - -<p>They were just in time for breakfast and never did -a meal taste better for, as Darry expressed it, “they -were all as hungry as Tomcats locked out for the -summer.” An hour was spent at the hotel and then -they hurried away to catch the steamer back to La -Guayra.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_212">[212]</span>“I’m going to take a nap when I get on board,” -said Mark, and this he did, and the others followed -his example. They slept for several hours and did -not stir until the steamer ran into the harbor of -Puerto Cabello, situated directly north of Valencia, -and thirty miles by railroad from that city.</p> - -<p>“Puerto Cabello means the Port of the Hair,” explained -Professor Strong. “The harbor is so safe -that it was said in olden times that a ship could be -anchored here by a single hair. This used to be a -terrible spot for yellow fever, and Sir Francis Drake -died here of the scourge, after capturing and looting -Caracas and other cities in Queen Elizabeth’s -time.”</p> - -<p>Puerto Cabello is one of the most important seaports -of Venezuela. Vessels from many countries -stop there, bringing in goods of all sorts and taking -away cargoes of coffee and cocoa in exchange. The -long warehouses of importers and exporters line the -docks and not far away is the railroad running to -Valencia and other points of more or less importance. -The public buildings are numerous and the usual -statues of Bolivar and other public characters are not -lacking. From Puerto Cabello to Valencia there is -a well-built wagon road and this is used constantly<span class="pagenum" id="Page_213">[213]</span> -by traders who are too old-fashioned to use the railroad.</p> - -<p>“You cannot hire some of the natives to get on a -train,” said the professor, while they were looking -around the town. “They look upon the railroad as -the invention of the Evil One. They are the ones -who have retarded the progress of South America -for centuries.”</p> - -<p>At Puerto Cabello the boys witnessed some trading -which was as interesting as it was amusing. An -old native had brought in some pineapples which he -wished to exchange in trade for some clothing. Instead -of lumping the value of his stock in trade, he -valued each pineapple separately and wanted to know -what it would bring in exchange. Thus he gave two -pineapples for a hat, three for a pair of slippers, one -for a flaming red neckerchief, one for a big brass -pin holding a polished bit of glass, and ten for a pair -of trousers. The latter bargain was made with difficulty, -the clothier taking the trousers and laying -them on his counter and the native placing one pineapple -after another alongside until the clothier -nodded his head to show that he was satisfied. Then -the native, having two pineapples left, traded them -for a small bottle of cologne.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_214">[214]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXIII<br /> - -<small>A STOP AT TRINIDAD</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Off</span> for the Orinoco at last! Now for some -real fun and excitement Mark, aren’t you glad that -we have left Caracas and La Guayra behind?”</p> - -<p>“I am Frank, and I hope the trip up the Orinoco -proves all we anticipate,” answered Mark, as he -threw himself into a steamer chair beside his chum. -“But as for excitement, I don’t think we have any -reason to complain. We’ve kept a-going pretty well -since we arrived.”</p> - -<p>“So we have,” put in Darry, who was close at -hand, watching the last speck of land fade from -sight. “But we haven’t had any fun, in the shape of -hunting, and I suppose that’s what Frank means.”</p> - -<p>“To be sure—and fishing, too, and camping out. -It’s all well enough to see the cities and towns, but -I want to see more—the great river and the wonderful -mountains and waterfalls, and all that.”</p> - -<p>“I want to see the wild horses,” came from Sam. -“They tell me they have any quantity of them down<span class="pagenum" id="Page_215">[215]</span> -on the <i>llanos</i>, and that you can buy a horse for a -dollar or two any time you want him.”</p> - -<p>“A wild horse wouldn’t be of much account until -he was broken,” said Mark. “And in trying to break -him you might break your own neck. You can be -sure they are not so easy to tame as our own domestic -horses.”</p> - -<p>“I want a shot at a puma or something like that,” -continued Darry. He had had it all planned out for -a long time—how he was going to send the skin -home for a rug to place in the parlor.</p> - -<p>They were on a British steamer bound for Port-of-Spain, -on Trinidad Island, which lies off the -north-east coast of Venezuela. From Port-of-Spain -they expected to catch another steamer bound directly -up the Orinoco to Ciudad Bolivar, the head of -navigation for large steamers, especially during the -dry season.</p> - -<p>“It’s a great coast,” said Mark, as he gazed back, -where the mountains were now lost in the distance. -“There ought to be splendid chances for mining -there.”</p> - -<p>“There are splendid chances,” said the professor, -who overheard the remark. “The mountains are -full of minerals. But at present most of the mining<span class="pagenum" id="Page_216">[216]</span> -is done in the interior. We will visit some of the -camps along the upper Orinoco.”</p> - -<p>The run to Port-of-Spain was a hot one, despite -the breezes which blew, and the boys were glad -enough when, one morning, the steamer turned into -the Gulf of Paria, a great land-locked harbor in -which a vessel can anchor anywhere with ease.</p> - -<p>“To the westward is the eastern shore of Venezuela,” -said the professor, “and on the east is the -island of Trinidad, which, as you all know, is a very -valuable British possession. Trinidad is known all -over the United States for it gives to us something -which is used on the finest of our streets. Do any of -you know what that is?”</p> - -<p>“Asphalt,” replied Frank. “I have heard that -there is a regular lake of it on the island.”</p> - -<p>“There is, ninety-nine acres in extent, and the -asphaltum flows over its banks in all directions, making -natural walks which are almost as hard as stone. -At the center of the lake the pitch is boiling hot and -bubbles up with an odor which is far from pleasant.”</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t mind seeing the place,” said Hockley.</p> - -<p>“We may get a chance to view it from a distance. -To get too close would not be pleasant. The job of -getting the asphaltum out is one of the meanest on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_217">[217]</span> -earth. The stuff is chopped off the surface in spots -where it is cold, and no matter how deep a hollow is -made, nature soon fills it again. How the Pitch -Lake, as it is termed, originated, has bothered scientists -since its discovery.”</p> - -<p>“Do you notice the difference in the appearance -of the water,” remarked Sam. “It was blue before, -now it is a dirty brown. Has that anything to do -with that Pitch Lake?”</p> - -<p>“No, Winthrop, the dirt you see is washed into -the Gulf from the Orinoco, which has a number of -mouths in this vicinity, as well as mouths emptying -directly into the Atlantic.”</p> - -<p>Before nightfall they came in sight of the port and -dropped anchor in the roadstead, for the harbor of -Port-of-Spain is too shallow to admit the passage -of large vessels. Soon a small craft came alongside -and took them ashore.</p> - -<p>“We are in an English country sure enough,” declared -Mark. “See how many English there are. -It does one good to hear the language spoken again.”</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid you’ll be disappointed in the town,” -said Professor Strong. “It looks so beautiful from -a distance. It is very dirty, and many of the houses -are little better than huts. Of course the English<span class="pagenum" id="Page_218">[218]</span> -that are here live well enough. It is the native element -that is away behind the times.”</p> - -<p>Nevertheless, the party managed to find a comfortable -hotel, kept by a whole-souled son of Great -Britain, who rejoiced in the name of Wellington -Cunningham.</p> - -<p>“Glad to know you,” said Wellington Cunningham. -“Make yourselves at ’ome. So you are bound -for the upper Orinoco, eh? Take my hadvice and -stay away from the bloody country. Hi know hall -habout it, Hi do. Went there in ’87 and halmost died -of the bloody fever. Hit ain’t fit for a white man. -If the fever gets you you’re a corpse.”</p> - -<p>“That’s cheerful,” was Mark’s comment. “But -we are not going to stay very long.”</p> - -<p>“Better not go. Hif you want to see the world -visit Hold Hingland. No better country on the -globe.”</p> - -<p>“No better?” queried Frank, with a wink at his -chums. “What of the United States?”</p> - -<p>“Too green, lad, too green. ’Twill be hall right -henough when you ’ave the age,” responded Wellington -Cunningham, solemnly.</p> - -<p>“It suits us—we wouldn’t want anything better,” -said Mark, dryly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_219">[219]</span>The hotel was crowded with people, and among -the number was a Colorado gold miner named Andrew -Hume, who was bound for the upper Orinoco -on a prospecting expedition. The miner was both -good-hearted and talkative and was soon on first-class -terms with our friends.</p> - -<p>“That Englishman makes me snicker,” said Andy -Hume, as he wished himself to be called. “He talks -about the States, and what he don’t know would fill -the Colorady river basin. Asked me if the Injuns -interfered with the mining, and if the miners and -other folks out west wasn’t afraid the bears and -buffaloes would eat ’em up! When I told him I -hadn’t seen a bear nor a buffalo for years, and told -him the only Injuns in our camp was three good-fer-nuthin -scamps who laid around the saloons all -day soaking firewater, he looked at me as if I was -crazy. He must think Colorady and Californy are -howling wildernesses.”</p> - -<p>“No doubt he does think that,” said Mark. “But -then, you must remember, we have some queer notions -of South America and South Africa. I didn’t -dream that everything in Venezuela—I mean in the -cities—was so up-to-date,—telephones, electric lights, -street cars, and all that.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_220">[220]</span>“Well, I’m with you there, lad, I didn’t dream -of ’em myself. And I heard of something yesterday -that kind of stumped me, too. They have mines and -mining machinery away up back in the country just -as good as any in Colorady or Californy. Some -syndicates running ’em and making millions out of -’em, too, I reckon.”</p> - -<p>It was found that Hume intended to take a steamer -for Ciudad Bolivar on the following Monday, and -the professor succeeded, after some difficulty, in procuring -passage for his party on the same vessel. -This pleased the old miner, and he said he trusted -they would have a good trip and become firm friends.</p> - -<p>Although the town of Port-of-Spain is far from -beautiful, the country back of the city is all that one’s -heart could desire. There are fine highways running -in all directions, lined with the most beautiful of -tropical trees and shrubbery. Flowers grow in -Trinidad in endless profusion and birds and butterflies -are equally numerous, not to mention the monkeys -and parrots.</p> - -<p>“It’s a Paradise in spots,” observed Darry. “But -only in spots. I don’t think I would care to live here.”</p> - -<p>On Sunday they visited the cathedral of the city, -and here heard not only an excellent sermon but likewise<span class="pagenum" id="Page_221">[221]</span> -some fine music. In the afternoon they visited -the botanical gardens, the pride of all Englishmen -residing in Trinidad. The collection of flowers, ferns -and trees were certainly remarkable and one not -easily forgotten.</p> - -<p>The boys were up bright and early Monday morning, -and by nine o’clock were on the steamer, bag -and baggage. At Port-of-Spain the professor had -visited a number of establishments and procured such -additions to their outfit as he deemed necessary.</p> - -<p>“We will have to go well equipped,” he said. -“For I know but little of the towns in the interior. -At the time I visited here before they amounted to -but little, so far as being able to buy what one wished -was concerned. They kept plenty of goods for the -native trade, but those things wouldn’t suit you.”</p> - -<p>“No, I’d rather stick to what I’m used to,” said -Sam. “It’s enough to go into a strange country -among a strange people, without putting up with -things to wear and use with which you are unacquainted.”</p> - -<p>At Port-of-Spain the boys all received letters from -home and sent long communications in return. They -related all their various adventures but touched -lightly upon the perils encountered.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_222">[222]</span>“It’s no use of scaring the folks to death,” was -the way in which Mark put it. “What’s past is -past, and let that end it.”</p> - -<p>“That’s true,” said Darry. “Besides, if we said -too much our folks might write to us to come home -on the next steamer.”</p> - -<p>The only one of the party who was at all downcast -was Hockley. This youth had hoped to meet -Dan Markel and get back at least some of his property. -Now he felt that the chance of doing this was -slipping away forever.</p> - -<p>“By the time we get back to the coast he’ll be gone -for good—and nobody will know where,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Well, why don’t you go back to Caracas and -hunt for him,” returned Frank. “We’re not compelling -you to go along.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, don’t blow about it,” cried Hockley, angrily. -“I’ll do what I please, without advice from -you.”</p> - -<p>“The man may turn up yet,” put in Mark. “I -don’t think he’d come to Venezuela without he had -some object in so doing.”</p> - -<p>“I heard him say something about a gold mine -once,” said Sam. “Perhaps he thought to try his<span class="pagenum" id="Page_223">[223]</span> -luck in that direction—after he found he had to -settle down.”</p> - -<p>“His gold mine is out of somebody else’s pocket,” -grumbled Hockley, and walked away, amid a laugh -which could not be repressed.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_224">[224]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXIV<br /> - -<small>UP THE RIVER TO BOLIVAR</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">There</span> are several ways of entering the Orinoco -proper, but the main stream is the Boca de Navios, -flowing eastward into the Atlantic. This great body -of water is cut into two channels, each about two -miles wide, by a series of islands, some little more -than marshlands and others hilly and covered with -heavy tropical growths.</p> - -<p>“The exact length of the Orinoco is not known,” -said the professor, in reply to a question from Mark. -“It would be a difficult matter to reach its source, -which is located somewhere in the Sierra Parime -Mountains, thousands of feet up among the clouds. -Roughly speaking the stream proper is almost two -thousand miles long.”</p> - -<p>“But we can’t sail that far, can we?” asked -Hockley.</p> - -<p>“By no means. Bolivar, for which we are now -bound, marks the head of tide water, and there we -will have to take a smaller vessel, even though the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_225">[225]</span> -river at that point is several miles wide and over -three hundred feet deep. Bolivar is about two hundred -and fifty miles from the ocean, and about half -way to where the Orinoco is joined by the Apure -River, in the west. From this point the Orinoco -branches southward, through a country of <i>llanos</i> -and immense forests, until it approaches the Sierra -Parime Mountains, where it is much broken by cascades -and rocky canyons. At this point there is a -small stream, the Casiquiare, which connects with -the Rio Negro, a large river flowing into the Amazon -of Brazil.”</p> - -<p>“Are there many towns on the river?” questioned -Frank.</p> - -<p>“Towns, yes, but no cities worth mentioning. -Along the upper Orinoco the inhabitants are mostly -natives who raise stock and gather cocoa beans, -tonqua beans—used for soaps and perfumes—and -fruits. To the southward, are immense forests -where rubber is found, and in the mountains are the -valuable mines which we have already mentioned. -Some of these mines are held to be worth ten to -twenty millions of dollars each.”</p> - -<p>“Gracious! I wouldn’t mind owning one of -those myself,” said Darry, in a low voice.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_226">[226]</span>“In years gone by the Spaniards worked these -mines and drew from them a wealth that amazed the -whole of Europe. But through revolutions and -earthquakes many of the mines were abandoned and -forgotten, and to this day some which are known to -have been exceedingly valuable cannot be located.”</p> - -<p>“I say, let us try to locate one of them!” cried -Frank, enthusiastically.</p> - -<p>“I don’t think you’ll have much luck,” responded -the professor, dryly. “Many of the best of miners -have tried and failed.”</p> - -<p>Mark turned to Andy Hume, who sat close by, -smoking a short briar-root pipe.</p> - -<p>“Is that your game, Mr. Hume?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Andy Hume, please,” returned the old miner. -“Never could get used to a handle to my name nohow.” -He blew a cloud of smoke into the air. -“Wall, about that being my game, it is and it isn’t. -I’m going prospecting, and I don’t care if I strike -something new or something old so long as it pans -out good. I’ve heard tell of those old Spanish mines -and of all the bloodshed it cost to get the gold out -of ’em and out of the country. In those days a man -wasn’t safe if he had over a hundred dollars’ worth -of dust on his person. And even when he got out<span class="pagenum" id="Page_227">[227]</span> -of the country he wasn’t certain but what some -pirate would capture the ship he was sailing on and -make him walk the plank to Davy Jones’ locker.”</p> - -<p>“I wish we were going with you,” said Darry, -impulsively.</p> - -<p>“Thank you, lad, but the life wouldn’t suit you -nohow. It’s not easy. Prospecting is dangerous -work, and I’ve seen the time when I got lost in the -mountains and didn’t have a bite to eat for forty-eight -hours. That’s an experience that’s enough to -drive one crazy.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose it is. But if you strike it rich—”</p> - -<p>“Ah, yes, if you do strike it. But you don’t more -often than you do.”</p> - -<p>“Did you ever strike luck in our own country?” -asked Hockley, who was as interested as anybody -in the conversation.</p> - -<p>“Yes, twice. Once I was in the Cripple Creek -district and found a nugget worth two thousand -dollars. Another time I was up on Lone Man’s -Ledge and located the Daisy Mine with a fellow -named Bargess. The Daisy proved to be a splendid -payer and we took out ten thousand dollars’ worth -of dust in less than two weeks. Both Bargess and -me were delighted I can tell you. I went down to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_228">[228]</span> -town to prove up the claim and while I was gone -what did Bargess do but gather all the gold in sight -and run away to Mexico with it.”</p> - -<p>“But he had to leave the mine,” said Darry.</p> - -<p>“He did, but it never paid as well as it had at the -start, and I stopped working it six weeks later. I -wish I could find Bargess.”</p> - -<p>“You never heard of him afterward?”</p> - -<p>“Never a word, excepting that somebody had -once seen him in Mexico at a town called La Dardado. -If I should run across him I think there -would be some warm work the next few minutes,” -added the old miner, pointedly.</p> - -<p>The accommodations on the steamer, while not -elegant, were yet sufficient for comfort, and the -days passed swiftly enough to the boys. Mark and -Darry were studying Spanish, for they felt that a -knowledge of the language would be of great use to -them. Frank and Sam also studied a little. Hockley -was too lazy to occupy himself in any manner. -Seeking a shady corner of the deck he would stretch -out at full length and sleep from one hour’s end to -the next.</p> - -<p>“He certainly believes in taking it easy,” said -Sam to Darry, as they happened to pass the youth.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_229">[229]</span> -“Of one thing you can be sure, he’ll never kill himself -by overwork.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t suppose he’ll have to, if his father is as -rich as he pretends. But the heat has got something -to do with his laziness. It’s terrific.”</p> - -<p>“Well, we can’t expect anything different for we -are within seven or eight degrees of the equator. -If it wasn’t for the nights I don’t see how any of us -could stand it.”</p> - -<p>Although the river was wide, the steamer moved -along the channel slowly and with caution. This -was done because of the numerous bars and snags -which form to impede navigation—just as they -sometimes form on the Mississippi and Missouri of -our own country.</p> - -<p>“It is said that once this river country was populated -by great tribes of Indians that have to-day -totally disappeared,” said the professor. “They -were a peaceful nation, living on the fruit which -abounded on every side, on the numerous fish which -the river afforded, and on the small wild animals -found in the forests. But soon after Columbus discovered -the land, the Spaniards came over with a -thirst for gold and power, and that was the end of a -peace which had perhaps reigned for centuries.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_230">[230]</span>“What of a pre-historic civilization here?” -asked Sam.</p> - -<p>“Some few traces have been found, but not many. -The civilization was confined more directly to the -western coast of the country and to Central America. -But even of that the most is lost, and lost perhaps -forever.”</p> - -<p>The outlook along the lower Orinoco is not inviting, -and the boys soon tired of it. Either bank -was lined with grass and reeds, with here and there -a patch of wild brushwood, the home of birds innumerable. -Pelicans were there, and wild ducks, -and there was an odor of heated salt-meadow water -which was at times almost overpowering. In the -distance were immense forests, but so far off that -nothing about them could be clearly distinguished.</p> - -<p>“Set a fellow ashore along there and he could get -lost without half trying,” observed Mark. “How -awfully lonesome it looks.”</p> - -<p>“Spare me from getting lost!” said Frank, with -something like a shiver. “I just want to have a -good time and nothing else.”</p> - -<p>To help pass the time, the professor brought out -one of the guns and some ammunition and let them -take turns at shooting the wild birds as they came<span class="pagenum" id="Page_231">[231]</span> -within reasonable distance, at the same time giving -the lads several necessary lessons in aiming.</p> - -<p>“Don’t be in a hurry,” he cautioned to Frank. -“Be quick, but not too quick, is a good huntsman’s -motto. Now try your hand at the pelican yonder.”</p> - -<p>Frank took careful aim and fired, but missed his -mark. Then Darry tried and the big water bird -was hit in the wing, and speedily dove out of sight -among the reeds.</p> - -<p>“Please let me try at something else,” pleaded -Frank, and when another bird came in range the -professor did so. The youth was now more careful -and the bird came down like a stone. But it fell -into the river and could not be secured.</p> - -<p>The shooting lasted all of an hour and at the conclusion -Professor Strong declared himself well satisfied -with results. “No one is such a terribly bad -shot,” he said. “And a little practice will do wonders, -as you will soon learn.”</p> - -<p>When the town of Bolivar was reached the boys -were surprised to find it located on a bluff, sixty or -seventy feet above the river level. It is a very -ancient place and boasts of a fortress built by the -Spaniards ages ago.</p> - -<p>“The town is built so high up on account of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_232">[232]</span> -swelling of the stream during the wet season,” said -Professor Strong. “When the rains are extra severe -the river rises fifty and even sixty feet and -often carries away large sections of plantations -along its bank.”</p> - -<p>“There seems to be plenty of shipping,” observed -Mark. “There are ships here of a dozen nationalities.”</p> - -<p>“Bolivar is the custom-house port for the whole -of the Orinoco, which accounts for all those ships -being here. The territory to be covered being so -vast, an immense amount of business is done, -amounting to millions of dollars annually. Gold is -exported in large quantities. There are a dozen factories -where cigars and stogies are made.”</p> - -<p>They were soon ashore and climbing the hilly -street to one of the hotels. It was a busy scene, and -quite like New York, so Mark declared, on account -of the various nationalities to be seen,—American -and English miners, German shipping merchants, -French and Italian shop and hotel keepers, and negro -and other native workmen, all intermingling in the -most friendly manner.</p> - -<p>“Everybody seems to be smoking,” said Darry. -“Negroes, priests, women and all. I never dreamed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_233">[233]</span> -of such a sight. And some of those workmen -haven’t clothing enough to be decent,” he added, in -some disgust.</p> - -<p>By inquiries at a shipping office it was learned -that no steamer for up the river could be had until -two days later. This would give them a chance to -inspect the city buildings, the parks, and other points -of interest.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_234">[234]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXV<br /> - -<small>SOMETHING ABOUT COCOA AND CHOCOLATE</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Before</span> we go any further up the river I wish -you boys to visit a cocoa plantation and learn something -about cocoa and chocolate,” said the professor -on the following morning. “There is a large plantation -not many miles from here, and we will take a -drive to it in a carriage immediately after breakfast.”</p> - -<p>At this announcement all were pleased but Hockley, -who drew down the corners of his mouth in disapproval.</p> - -<p>“It will be dead slow,” he muttered. “I’d rather -see the sights in the town.”</p> - -<p>“We will view those later,” replied the professor. -He had no intention of leaving the tall youth behind -again, and Hockley realized it and made no further -remonstrance.</p> - -<p>The plantation was a large affair, situated upon -a small creek flowing into the Orinoco. It was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_235">[235]</span> -owned by a German merchant doing business in -Bolivar, and it was the merchant himself who -showed them around the place.</p> - -<p>“As you can see,” said Professor Strong, when -they were walking around, “the cocoa is set out -very much as is coffee. The seeds are planted in a -seed-bed and kept there two or three months. Then -the shoots are planted in the field, between shade -trees, with ditches cut through the field for irrigating -purposes. The trees begin to bear in about -five years and with care will last for thirty-five to -forty years.”</p> - -<p>“But where does the chocolate come in?” interrupted -Hockley.</p> - -<p>“Chocolate is made from the seed of the cocoa -pod, so called. This pod, as you can see, is about -the shape of a cantelope, and when ripe, is reddish -in color. Each pod contains fifty or seventy-five -seeds, each the size of one’s thumb nail. The trees -give two crops a year, one in June and the other in -December.”</p> - -<p>“Do they use the beans as they are?” came from -Sam.</p> - -<p>“No. After the pods are gathered they are -placed in the sun to dry. As soon as they burst<span class="pagenum" id="Page_236">[236]</span> -open the beans are shelled out and sorted. Some -growers then bag them and sell them in that shape, -but others declare that the best cocoa is produced by -placing the beans in the ground until they are about -half rotted. Cocoa, such as we drink at home, is -made by breaking the beans up, or shaving them fine, -and then boiling in water or milk, and serving with -sugar. Chocolate is made by mixing the crushed up -beans with sugar and with some spices, to give it a -special flavor. Of course you all know cake chocolate -and chocolate bonbons. Cake chocolate unsweetened -is generally cocoa beans ground up and -mixed with flour or other foreign substances to give -it weight. Sweet chocolate cakes have sugar, honey -and very often some spices in them. Bonbons are -made of cocoa, sugar, flavoring extracts and anything -else the wide-awake confectioner chooses to -put into them to strike the palate of his customer. -Cocoa and chocolate, if pure, are very nourishing, -and have none of the bad effects on the system that -are attributed to coffee.”</p> - -<p>“What is cacao?” asked Frank.</p> - -<p>“That is only another name for cocoa, Newton. -Cocoa often grows in a wild state, but the beans are -not as large as when cultivated. In some districts,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_237">[237]</span> -where money is scarce, cocoa beans are used instead -in buying and selling. A native will gather all the -beans he can in a little bag and then come into town -and barter them for whatever he wants—and there -was a time when he could pay his taxes in beans.”</p> - -<p>“Well, that isn’t so very strange,” put in Darry. -“In revolutionary times in our own country, they -used to pay taxes and other demands in corn and -grain.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, and they pay taxes now, in country places, -by working on the public highways,” added Frank.</p> - -<p>The walk around the cocoa plantation proved full -of interest, and when it was concluded and they had -taken some of the bitter-sweet beans from a tree as -souvenirs the proprietor of the place invited them -to lunch in his summer-house, an affair built in true -German style under the wide spreading branches of -a royal palm.</p> - -<p>“In my <i>gartenlaube</i> you shall drink chocolate that -is chocolate,” said their host. “Not the chocolate -you often get at home, adulterated with pipe-clay or -something like that, but that which is made from -the pure bean mixed with the cleanest of sugar.”</p> - -<p>He was as good as his word, and with the creamy -chocolate came German coffee-cake equally good.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_238">[238]</span> -All of the boys drank the chocolate eagerly, and -Frank could not help but smack his lips over it.</p> - -<p>“I never tasted anything better,” he declared. -“If I could get it as good at home I’d never touch -coffee again,” and Mark said the same.</p> - -<p>Their host was a talkative man, and wished to -know all about their proposed trip up the river.</p> - -<p>“You will see many interesting sights,” he said. -“I have been up twice—four years ago and two -years ago. The last time I went up the natives were -having a bitter quarrel among themselves and I had -all I could do to keep out of trouble. But generally -they are very friendly and will do anything for you -if you pay them fair wages.”</p> - -<p>On returning to the city they met Andy Hume, -who had been interviewing a number of miners who -had just come in from one of the mining districts.</p> - -<p>“They’ve struck two new mines,” he said, “and -both good payers. I pumped ’em pretty thoroughly -and I think I can strike something good if I go right -at it. I wish the boat sailed to-day instead of to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“You’ll have to be patient,” said Professor -Strong, with a smile. “I fancy you will find plenty -of unexplored territory when you get there.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_239">[239]</span>With so many things to look at the time slipped by -quickly. An hour was spent the next day at one -of the cigar factories, where the boys watched the -workmen roll cigars and pack them in boxes. But -the smell was so strong that Frank and Sam came -away more than half sick.</p> - -<p>“I can’t imagine how they can stand it to work -in such a place,” said Frank. “It’s enough to -sicken a dog.”</p> - -<p>“It is what they get used to,” said Mark. “But -I must say I didn’t like it myself.”</p> - -<p>At last came the time to bid adieu to Bolivar, -which in former days was called Angostura. They -went aboard the little paddle-box steamer loaded -with bundles, for they had left their trunks at the -hotel, to remain there until their return.</p> - -<p>“I suppose that’s the last of civilization,” remarked -Frank. “Now for the forests and a good -time hunting, fishing, and camping out.”</p> - -<p>“You mustn’t be quite so fast,” said the professor, -with a laugh. “It will be at least a week -before we reach any place for hunting and fishing. -Of course we could stop off on the way, but I take it -you boys wish to get right into the mountains.”</p> - -<p>“So we do,” came from several of the others.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_240">[240]</span>“This boat will make a number of stops first—at -Muitogo, at Altagracia, at Caicara, where the -river Apure joins the Orinoco, and at points of lesser -importance, until we reach the Meta River, which -runs into Colombia. At that point we will disembark -and hire a native boat to take us up into the -mountains as far as we care to go, past the Falls of -Atures and into a region which is even to-day but -little known to the outside world.”</p> - -<p>“And how many miles shall we sail to get to the -mountains?” asked Darry.</p> - -<p>“About six hundred from here.”</p> - -<p>“And after that how far shall we go?” questioned -Hockley.</p> - -<p>“As far as we please. You all wish to see what -a tropical jungle is like, and wish to hunt and fish, -and I am going to do my best to accommodate you. -If all goes well, we will have some excellent sport -between now and the time we return,” concluded -Professor Strong.</p> - -<p>To the boys, impatient to get into the forests, the -time on the side-wheeler went but slowly. Day -after day was spent on deck, gazing at the vast plains -on one side of the river and the forest on the other. -They made the stops mentioned, and also several<span class="pagenum" id="Page_241">[241]</span> -others, but none of the party went ashore, for the -heat was terrific.</p> - -<p>“We can’t get out of this too quick for me,” said -Hockley. “I feel about half fried out already.”</p> - -<p>“The climate changes as one nears the mountains,” -returned the professor. “You won’t suffer -so much in a few days,” and his words proved true. -As they came in sight of the first of the mountains—really -the foothills of the Andes—the thermometer -dropped half a dozen degrees and the nights proved -all that could be desired.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_242">[242]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXVI<br /> - -<small>CAMPING ON THE UPPER ORINOCO</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">What</span> a truly grand sight!”</p> - -<p>It was Mark who uttered the words. He stood -in the bow of a long canoe, manned by a single Indian, -who was sending the craft along the bosom of -the silent river with skill and swiftness.</p> - -<p>On each side of the canoe the dark waters of the -upper Orinoco stretched to a distance of a hundred -yards or more. Beyond were gigantic forests of -mahogany, rose-wood, grenadilla, ebony, and rubber -trees. Beneath the trees were immense ferns and -strange varicolored mosses, and over and through -all grew the ever-present tropical vines, forming -meshes which were well-nigh impassable.</p> - -<p>The sun shone far to the westward, but the river -lay in a deep shadow, and the many birds which had -sung so gaily during the day had ceased their song, -giving place to the sounds of the oncoming night. -Far in the distance some wild parrots screeched out -boldly, and many monkeys added a chorus of their<span class="pagenum" id="Page_243">[243]</span> -own. As Mark gazed at a tree which stood at the -bend of the stream he saw something uncurl itself -and drop into the water with a slight splash.</p> - -<p>“What was that?” he asked of the professor, -who was nearest to him.</p> - -<p>“That was a water snake, Robertson. An ugly -creature, too, if you meet him in his native element.”</p> - -<p>“Ugh, a snake! Then I guess we won’t land -there.”</p> - -<p>“The Indian says he knows of a nice spot a mile -beyond here, where there is a cleared place on the -brow of a little bluff. To camp in the midst of such -a jungle as this would be very unwise.”</p> - -<p>For three days the party had been traveling along -the upper Orinoco in the canoe, which was a stout -affair, over twenty feet long and with a little hood -in the stern for protection from the sun. The last -village at which they had stopped had been left ten -miles behind and here they had bidden adieu to -Andy Hume, who was in another boat and who -wished to explore one of the many tributaries of the -Orinoco which join the mighty stream at this point.</p> - -<p>The trip in the canoe had been full of interest. -They passed several rapids, and at one point had -had to “tote” the canoe and its contents around a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_244">[244]</span> -picturesque waterfall. They had gone fishing under -the directions of the Indian, whose name was Cubara, -and had brought in a fine mess, which had been -cooked over the camp-fire in true hunter fashion. -They had even gone hunting and each of the boys -had brought down several tropical birds of gorgeous -plumage. They had wanted to go swimming, but -this the professor had not allowed, fearing there -might be something in the water to harm them.</p> - -<p>The Indian was a knowing fellow and bright, although -not given to much talking. He had been -selected by the professor because of his knowledge -of English, which was, however, slight. He took -particularly to Frank, who had given him a pocket -looking-glass he chanced to have with him.</p> - -<p>“Well I wish we were landed,” grumbled Hockley, -who sat under the hood of the canoe, taking it -easy. “I am tired of this everlasting water. There -is a sameness that is perfectly sickening.”</p> - -<p>“That’s because you don’t enjoy the beauties of -nature,” returned Darry, with a grin. “You haven’t -the poetic temperament, so to speak.”</p> - -<p>“You needn’t poke fun at me,” growled the lank -youth, with a scowl. “I say there is sameness,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_245">[245]</span> -and there is. It’s been nothing but water and trees -ever since we started.”</p> - -<p>“If I were you, Hockley, I’d get out and wade -back,” put in Frank. “I can’t imagine what made -you come.”</p> - -<p>“I came to have a good time, but it’s no good -time drifting in a canoe like this,” was the surly response. -“If we were ashore—”</p> - -<p>“We’ll soon be ashore,” interrupted Mark. -“There is the bluff, just around the bend. Cubara -is right, it’s an ideal spot for camping out.”</p> - -<p>“If there isn’t a puma there waiting to chew us -up,” added Frank, but the smile on his face showed -that he was not particularly afraid.</p> - -<p>The canoe was run in among the bushes lining -the bank below the bluff, and leaping ashore the Indian -pulled the craft well out of the water. Then -one after another leaped to the dry ground beyond.</p> - -<p>“Leave the baggage where it is for the present,” -said the professor. “I want to take a look around -before I decide to pitch camp. There may be some -objection which Cubara has overlooked.”</p> - -<p>But there was none, and soon they had everything -ashore and up to the edge of the bluff, which arose<span class="pagenum" id="Page_246">[246]</span> -from the surrounding jungle to a height of thirty -feet. To one side of the bluff was a series of rough -rocks leading down to the river and on the other was -a beautiful waterfall coming from a mountain a mile -or more to the eastward. On the other side of the -Orinoco the virgin forests stretched for miles.</p> - -<p>As in all tropical localities night came on swiftly, -and by the time they had brought all their things to -the top of the bluff and started a camp-fire darkness -was upon them, lit up only by a few bright stars far -overhead. They had brought with them a fair sized -tent and Sam and Darry were soon hard at work -cutting the necessary poles for erecting the shelter.</p> - -<p>“These forests look as if they had never seen the -axe of a woodsman,” said Sam. “What immense -trees! Some of them must be two hundred feet -high.”</p> - -<p>The poles were soon cut and then the erection of -the tent began. It was placed at a point where the -ground sloped a little, which would allow the water -to run off in case it rained. It was fastened down -with extra heavy stakes so that nothing short of a -hurricane would be able to level it.</p> - -<p>The tent erected, they took the most valuable of -their stores inside, piling them up at the rear. There<span class="pagenum" id="Page_247">[247]</span> -was a case for their guns, another containing ammunition, -and a third medicines, and also several bundles -of clothing. They had also brought with them -a number of canned goods, coffee, sugar, salt and -some jerked beef, in case they should be unable to -bring down their own meat. The jerked beef had -been purchased at Apure, where there is a large -market for beef, both “on the hoof” and prepared. -Among the stores were also a bag of flour and a -small bag of beans—the latter brought along by -Sam, who declared that he was going to have his -usual Sunday morning delicacy, no matter what happened.</p> - -<p>It was decided by the professor that throughout -their stay in the jungle each should take his turn at -watching during the night. “There are seven of us -all told,” he said. “And that will give each only -about an hour apiece, which will be no hardship. -Perhaps nothing will come to disturb us, but with -one on guard all the others will be able to sleep in -comfort.”</p> - -<p>The first night in the camp passed without anything -unusual occurring. The boys were up bright -and early, and Mark discovered a pool at the foot -of the waterfall where they might bathe and wash<span class="pagenum" id="Page_248">[248]</span> -to their hearts’ content. The water was as cool as -it was pure and refreshed them wonderfully.</p> - -<p>“Makes a fellow feel like living again,” cried -Darry, as he splashed around. “I presume that -water comes from the very top of yonder mountain.”</p> - -<p>“No doubt of it,” returned Mark, “and some of -it may be melted snow for all we know.”</p> - -<p>Hockley had been too lazy to take a bath, and still -lay on the flooring of the tent, snoring lustily. To -wake him up, Darry went and pulled him by the -foot.</p> - -<p>“Hi, you, let go!” cried the sleepy youth, as he -sat up. “Can’t you let me sleep?”</p> - -<p>“Time for breakfast,” returned Darry. “We’ve -had a bath.”</p> - -<p>“Have you? Well, I’m not so dirty as all that. -After this you let me sleep as long as I please.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” returned Darry, coolly. And as he -turned away he added, in an undertone to Frank: -“What a perfect bear he is! I wish he had remained -at home.”</p> - -<p>“So do I,” was the answer. “But as he is with -us we’ll have to make the best of it.”</p> - -<p>While the others were getting breakfast Hockley -began leisurely to dress himself. He had pulled on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_249">[249]</span> -one shoe and was holding the other when of a sudden -he gave a cry of terror and leaped up wildly.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/p248.jpg" alt="" /></div> -<p class="caption">“Take it off! Take it off!”</p> - -<p>“Take it off! Take it off!”</p> - -<p>“What is it?” demanded the professor, quickly, -and rushed to his side.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know what it is. It crawled out of my -shoe. Take it off!”</p> - -<p>He pointed to a creature four or five inches long, -with many legs and with horned jaws, which rested -on his knee, shaking its tiny head from one side to -the other.</p> - -<p>“A centipede!” murmured Professor Strong, and -doubling up his finger he snapped the thing to the -ground and there quickly stamped on it.</p> - -<p>“A centipede!” bawled Hockley. “They’re -poisonous, so I’ve heard. I—I think he bit me in -the back of the hand. Do you think that if he did -it will prove fa-fatal?” And he turned pale.</p> - -<p>“I don’t think so, Hockley. Let me see your -hand.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir. But hadn’t we better get out of here? -There may be more around?”</p> - -<p>“We might go where there are more instead of -less. Venezuela is full of centipedes, and some of -them are dangerous. But that wasn’t such a big<span class="pagenum" id="Page_250">[250]</span> -fellow, and your hand seems to be all right. They -won’t bite a human being unless they are pushed to -it, and some natives do not mind the bites at all.”</p> - -<p>“No hurt me,” put in Cubara, with a smile. -“Some of my people eat dem—no poison much, -no,” and he shook his head vigorously.</p> - -<p>“I don’t want any more of them,” growled Hockley. -“What a nasty looking thing—with so many -legs!”</p> - -<p>“You always want to shake out everything you -wear before you put it on,” said the professor, to all -of the boys. “If you don’t you may encounter -scorpions and tarantulas as well as centipedes. They -are the great drawbacks to almost every hot country.”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_251">[251]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXVII<br /> - -<small>BRINGING DOWN AN OCELOT</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">The</span> centipede scare had been almost too much -for Hockley, and he hardly ate a mouthful of the -breakfast which the others prepared.</p> - -<p>“It’s a nasty country—I’m sorry I came here,” -he told Mark. “I expected a better time.”</p> - -<p>“Well you are here and that’s the end of it,” was -the simple answer. “But perhaps things won’t be -so bad after we get used to it.”</p> - -<p>“I thought it would be like hunting in the mountains -of Pennsylvania. I once went out there and -had a fine time, bringing down small game and fishing -for trout. But that awfully big jungle—” -Hockley did not finish, but his look of fear was more -impressive than words.</p> - -<p>However, the breakfast passed off pleasantly -enough and inside of an hour all the boys were at -the river bank, baiting their hooks under the direction -of Cubara, who told them that he had once -made his living as a fisherman.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_252">[252]</span>“I catch de fish in de mountains,” he said. “Sell -dem to de gold miners. Da no take time to fish, so -pay big price.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose the miners don’t care to do anything -but hunt for gold,” remarked Frank.</p> - -<p>“Hunt, hunt, hunt, night an’ day,” was the answer. -“Some go ’way up de big mountains, stay -dare many, many moons, come back, no gold, all -crazy.”</p> - -<p>“Crazy!”</p> - -<p>“Yes, crazy, stay alone so long, no want dat to -fish for him. He crazy, maybe he kill!” And Cubara -shrugged his bony shoulders.</p> - -<p>“That’s a cheerful outlook for Andy Hume,” -murmured Mark. “I sincerely hope he doesn’t go -crazy through loneliness.”</p> - -<p>“I have heard of such cases in our own country,” -put in the professor. “Some miners went crazy -during the gold fever in California, and only a few -months ago I was reading in the newspapers of a -prospector in Alaska who had gone insane through -having lost himself in the mountains. It is no -child’s play—this trying to make nature yield up -her secrets.”</p> - -<p>Fishing lasted all of the morning, and by noon<span class="pagenum" id="Page_253">[253]</span> -they had twenty-odd specimens of the finny tribe in -a pool of fresh water among the rocks. Most of the -catch were of the perch variety, although somewhat -different from the class usually found in our own -streams.</p> - -<p>“Haven’t run across any of those wonderful electric -eels,” said Hockley. “I thought we’d be sure -to be shocked to death,” he added, with a sniff.</p> - -<p>“Electric eels not here,” said Cubara. “Take -you to dem udder day maybe.”</p> - -<p>“I want to go hunting first,” put in Sam. He -was longing to shoot something big.</p> - -<p>“We’ll go hunting this afternoon,” said the professor.</p> - -<p>“I don’t care to go hunting,” said Hockley. “I’d -rather take it easy to-day.”</p> - -<p>“Very well, then, you may remain in camp with -Cubara, Hockley.”</p> - -<p>The dinner was rather a hasty one, and a short -while later Professor Strong and four of the boys -set out. Each was armed with a rifle or shotgun, -and each carried some food for supper, should they -not return until late.</p> - -<p>The professor had had a long talk with the Indian -regarding the game in the vicinity, and Cubara had<span class="pagenum" id="Page_254">[254]</span> -told him where they were likely to find a number of -peccaries, a wild animal common to many parts of -Venezuela and one much sought after by the natives -for food. The peccary is not unlike a wild hog in -general appearance, and when full grown weighs -from fifty to sixty pounds. They are very fierce -when attacked and have short tusks which are as -sharp as daggers.</p> - -<p>The way was up the mountain side behind the -camp, over tall rocks and around spots where the -undergrowth was absolutely impenetrable. Overhead -the sun shone down from a cloudless sky, yet -under the gigantic trees not a ray was to be found, -so thick was the foliage.</p> - -<p>As they advanced the constant screeching of -green parrots reached their ears, mingled with the -distant pandemonium created by a tribe of howling -monkeys.</p> - -<p>“What a noise they make,” cried Darry. “I -never heard such a racket in my life.”</p> - -<p>“Those monkeys are the genuine ring-tail howling -monkeys,” laughed the professor. “They are -the pest of a hunter’s camp. When once they make -up their mind to serenade you at night nothing short -of a hurricane can stop them. Their howl, heard<span class="pagenum" id="Page_255">[255]</span> -in the darkness, is the most mournful sound on earth, -ten times worse than that of a dog baying at the -moon.”</p> - -<p>“Are they dangerous?” asked Sam.</p> - -<p>“Not generally speaking, although you want to -be careful of what you do to them. A shot from a -gun will sometimes scatter them for an hour or so. -But if you pick up a stone and hurl it at them, they -will surely pick up other stones to hurl at you in -return.”</p> - -<p>In two hours they had covered a distance of several -miles. Nothing had been seen of peccaries, and -somewhat disheartened they came to a halt near the -bank of a mountain torrent which, at that point, -formed a pool several rods in extent.</p> - -<p>“Hush!” said the professor suddenly. “Get -down behind the bushes. There is a fine shot for -all of us.”</p> - -<p>They dropped down, and then gazed in the direction -he pointed out. Sitting on some tall bushes -overhanging the opposite side of the pool were a -number of birds almost as large as wild turkeys. -They were bluish in color, with a greenish tinge -under the throat fading to white. On the head of -each was a crest of yellow which looked like gold.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_256">[256]</span>“What beauties!” murmured Sam.</p> - -<p>“Ready, all of you,” came from the professor. -“Take aim. Fire!”</p> - -<p>The word was not yet out of his mouth when the -birds became alarmed and started to rise. But at -the volley two dropped into the water dead while -two others fluttered helplessly among the trees. The -professor and Mark ran after the latter and after -some trouble put them to death and brought them -in. In the meantime those in the pool were also -secured.</p> - -<p>“These birds are crested curassows, or hoccos,” -said the professor. “Some of them are the color -of those we have shot but the majority are black. -They are very numerous in Venezuela, Guiana, and -Brazil, and a great many people keep them as we do -tame turkeys, and the meat is very much the same.”</p> - -<p>“Hurrah for the turkey meat!” exclaimed Frank. -“That will be a change from our fish diet.”</p> - -<p>With the curassows slung over their backs they -proceeded on their way, around the pool and up the -mountain torrent, to where there was a small stretch -of table-land. From this point they could obtain a -clear view of the surrounding country for many -miles.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_257">[257]</span>“There is the Orinoco,” said Mark, pointing to -the stream as it glistened in the sunlight. “But -the hill is between us and our camp.”</p> - -<p>On the table-land they brought down a score of -birds, including a trogon, a beautiful creature of -black, green and gold, with long, sweeping tail; a -pair of birds of the sparrow-hawk variety; and several -humming-birds.</p> - -<p>“These humming-birds are called the ruby and -topaz,” said Professor Strong. “They are hunted -down by the thousands each year and are used in the -decoration, principally, of ladies’ hats.”</p> - -<p>“They are certainly pretty,” said Sam. “But -what a shame to slaughter them in such a wholesale -fashion.”</p> - -<p>“All sorts of tropical birds are slaughtered merely -for the purposes of the milliner,” went on the professor. -“It is certainly a shame, but so long as the -ladies demand feathers on their hats the slaughter -will probably continue.”</p> - -<p>Leaving the table-land they plunged again into -the forest. The professor had found tracks which -he felt certain belonged to some wild animals, and -as they advanced each held his gun ready for use -should the occasion require.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_258">[258]</span>The occasion was not long in coming. Directly -in front of them was a fallen tree, a veritable monarch -of the forest, all of nine feet in diameter and -with branches spreading in all directions. As they -were making their way around the roots of this tree -they heard a low snarl of rage and saw a wild beast -not unlike a huge cat leap from the roots with -another wild beast in its mouth.</p> - -<p>Crack! went the professor’s rifle and the bullet -hit the beast in the forepaw. At once it dropped -its prey—an armadillo—and faced around with -another snarl of rage more fierce than ever.</p> - -<p>“He’s coming for us!” yelled Mark, and fired -his own gun. But his aim was not true and the -bullet merely grazed the beast’s tail.</p> - -<p>By this time the ocelot—for such the animal -proved to be—was up on the tree trunk, glaring directly -down upon them. He was closer to Frank -than to anyone else, and it looked as if he would leap -upon the youth without further delay.</p> - -<p>It must be confessed that Frank was badly frightened. -But he did not lose his total presence of -mind, and almost mechanically he lifted the shotgun -he carried and blazed away. At the same time -Sam and Darry fired, and between the three the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_259">[259]</span> -ocelot was mortally wounded and rolled to the -ground, growling and snarling in a fashion fearful -to contemplate. Then the professor rushed in and -with a shot at short range finished the beast.</p> - -<p>“Say, but that was a close call all around,” came -from Mark, when the excitement was over.</p> - -<p>“That’s what it was,” returned Frank, breathing -heavily. “I don’t want to get in such close quarters -again. I thought sure he was going to nab -me.”</p> - -<p>The professor was much vexed that his first shot -had not killed the ocelot. “I must be getting rusty -in my shooting,” he said.</p> - -<p>The armadillo was limping away on three legs, -for the ocelot had bitten it severely through the -hind quarters. But before it could get very far, -Darry and Sam went after it and brought it low. -Then they dragged it back by its tail and laid it beside -the larger beast.</p> - -<p>The ocelot was a beautiful specimen, measuring -four feet from nose to tip of tail. It was of a greyish -fawn color, with stripes and patches of black. -The eyes were yellowish brown, full and round. The -boys could well imagine how they might glitter in -the darkness of night.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_260">[260]</span>“This creature belongs to the leopard family,” -said the professor, while reloading his rifle. “They -are very powerful, and frequently attack animals -twice their size. There are a number of varieties, -and some go by the common name of tiger cats. -The skins are very valuable for rugs and other purposes.”</p> - -<p>“What about the meat?” questioned Darry.</p> - -<p>“The natives eat the meat of almost every wild -beast. Personally I have never tried ocelot steaks, -although I have been told they are fairly good eating.”</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_261">[261]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXVIII<br /> - -<small>MONKEYS AND A CANOE</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">After</span> the bringing down of the ocelot several -days passed without anything unusual happening. -The boys went hunting and fishing to their heart’s -content and brought down many small animals, but -nothing of great importance outside of a pair of -peccaries, which were found in a hollow tree by Sam -and brought down by him and Darry. The peccary -proved to be sweet eating, and Cubara was particularly -pleased to get the meat.</p> - -<p>“Werry nice him,” he said. “Love him werry -much. Eat him ev’ry day fo’ many, many moons.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you could,” answered Darry. “But I’d -get mighty sick of it in a couple of days.”</p> - -<p>Frank and Mark had been planning to go hunting -on their own account, further up the river, and at -last obtained the professor’s permission to use the -canoe for that purpose.</p> - -<p>“But you must be very careful, boys,” said Professor<span class="pagenum" id="Page_262">[262]</span> -Strong. “Do not go ashore unless you are -sure of your ground, and come back before sunset.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll remember,” said Frank. “We only want -to go along the river bank for a mile or two.”</p> - -<p>In coming up to the camp both Frank and Mark -had taken instructions from Cubara concerning the -handling of the canoe, so they had no difficulty in -embarking and paddling up the river, which so far -as eye could reach was as smooth as a mill-pond excepting -where the mountain torrent ran into it over -the bluff.</p> - -<p>“If only we can bring down a puma or something -like that,” said Frank, as they left the camp behind. -“Won’t the others be envious!”</p> - -<p>“We’d have our hands full with a puma I’m thinking,” -returned Mark. “Why they are just like the -panthers of our own country. We had better try -for something smaller first.”</p> - -<p>The camp was soon out of sight, around a turn of -the stream, and then they pulled in close to shore, to -see if they could find any trace of something worth -shooting.</p> - -<p>“This is slow,” remarked Mark, after a long silence, -during which they had paddled the best part of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_263">[263]</span> -a mile. “I haven’t seen a single thing worth mentioning.”</p> - -<p>“Nor I. I have half a mind to throw a line overboard -and go fishing,” replied Frank.</p> - -<p>“All right, do so, and I’ll paddle for awhile.”</p> - -<p>The line was baited and thrown into the water. -Scarcely had it sunk a yard when there came a nibble -and a pull which almost caused Frank to go overboard.</p> - -<p>“I’ve got something big now!” gasped Frank, -holding on to the line with one hand and the canoe -seat with the other.</p> - -<p>“What is it?” questioned Mark, quickly.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know, but it pulls like a whale.”</p> - -<p>“Let me help you,” continued Mark, and dropped -the paddle on the bottom of the canoe. Then both -tried to haul in the line, but before they could do so -there was a swish in the water and a big, black object -appeared for a moment, a black object with a -greenish head and sharp greenish eyes. At this both -lads fell back in dismay.</p> - -<p>“A water snake!” cried Mark. “And a big one, -too. Better cut him loose.”</p> - -<p>The canoe was now spinning up the stream, -dragged by the snake who showed his head with the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_264">[264]</span> -fishhook caught in one side close to the eye. That -the reptile was angry and ready to fight there could -be no doubt.</p> - -<p>As quickly as he could Frank brought out his knife -and sawed away at the line. As it parted the snake -came up again, lifting his head into the canoe and -hissing viciously. Then he glided along the side of -the craft, bent upon attacking Frank.</p> - -<p>Mark had his gun handy and quick as a flash he -caught up the weapon. Bang! went the gun, and -the water snake caught the charge full in the face. -With a wild flapping he arose in the air, whipped -his slimy body across Frank’s leg and sank out of -sight into the river.</p> - -<p>For the moment the boys gazed after the reptile -in a horror that no words can express. Frank had -sunk on the seat trembling in every joint and Mark -was equally affected.</p> - -<p>“Is he—he dead?” came at last from the younger -youth.</p> - -<p>“Guess he is,” answered Mark, in a hoarse voice. -“Anyway he’s gone, and so is the fishing line.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t care about the line, Mark. Wasn’t he -awful?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_265">[265]</span>“That’s what he was, Frank—the nastiest thing -I ever saw in my life.”</p> - -<p>“That settles fishing for me. I wouldn’t want to -catch another water snake for a million dollars!”</p> - -<p>It was fully five minutes before they continued on -their way, and then they did so quietly, as if afraid -a noise might bring the reptile after them again. -But the snake failed to re-appear and soon they were -a mile or more away from the spot.</p> - -<p>Just before encountering the snake they had -noticed a tribe of monkeys on the shore, watching -them intently. The monkeys had followed them for -a short distance but had dropped out of sight as -soon as the water snake appeared.</p> - -<p>“There come the monkeys again,” said Mark, -presently, and he was right. With a strange shrieking -and howling they pushed some brushwood aside -and came close to the water’s edge, where they -squatted in a long row, eyeing the canoe in a wondering -manner and occasionally reaching out a paw -as if beckoning the craft to come closer.</p> - -<p>“No, thank you,” said Frank, mockingly. “We -don’t care to trust ourselves in your hands.”</p> - -<p>As they pushed up the river the monkeys followed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_266">[266]</span> -them, still howling, sometimes singly and then in a -deafening chorus.</p> - -<p>“There is this much about it,” said Frank, as he -gazed at the creatures, which numbered fully a hundred. -“I don’t want to land while they are around.”</p> - -<p>“Nor I,” answered his chum. “But we’ve got -to land soon, or else go back. We’re at least six or -seven miles from camp now, and that’s far enough.”</p> - -<p>“Supposing I give them a shot?”</p> - -<p>“All right, blaze away, but don’t hurt too many -of them.”</p> - -<p>The shotgun was discharged and one monkey was -killed and several wounded. Instantly the others -set up a fearful screeching and fled in dismay, -through the jungle, until their howling was lost in -the distance.</p> - -<p>Pushing up the river a little further, the two boys -landed and pulled their craft partly out of the water. -They looked around cautiously but the only living -creatures that appeared were a few birds and they -kept at a safe distance.</p> - -<p>“There seems to be a sort of open trail to the -northward,” said Mark. “Supposing we follow -that? I haven’t any fancy for the jungle itself.”</p> - -<p>Frank was willing, and soon they were tramping<span class="pagenum" id="Page_267">[267]</span> -the trail, which led up a hill and around a series of -rocks overgrown with gigantic ferns and vines.</p> - -<p>“What a peculiar smell,” said Mark, after they -had passed the rocks. “Smells for all the world like -the root beer we drink at home.”</p> - -<p>“I know what it is,” answered his chum. “It’s a -sassafras grove we are entering. The professor was -telling me of them. They are common here and so -are other barks that druggists use.”</p> - -<p>A little while later they sighted several small animals, -not unlike hares, which crossed their pathway -so rapidly that they could not get a shot at the creatures. -Then they came to a flock of curassows and -by skillful maneuvering got so close that they -brought down three before the birds knew enough to -take to flight.</p> - -<p>“Anyway we’ve got something for our trouble,” -said Frank. “I was beginning to think we’d have -to go back empty-handed. If we—— What’s -that?”</p> - -<p>The youth broke off short and looked inquiringly -at his chum. From a distance had come a peculiar -roar, not unlike that of a lion or tiger.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps it’s a puma,” said Mark. “Hark! It’s -coming closer!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_268">[268]</span>They listened once more, and as the sound was -repeated, each drew up his gun in readiness to fire. -Then they heard a savage snarl, followed by a -screeching and yelping.</p> - -<p>“Two wild animals fighting,” said Frank. “My -how they must be chewing each other up!”</p> - -<p>They continued to listen and gradually the sounds -became fainter and fainter. Then came a final roar -and all became quiet.</p> - -<p>“One of them has been killed,” said Mark.</p> - -<p>“Yes, and the roaring beast is the victor,” answered -Frank. “Shall we go ahead and try to find -out what it is?”</p> - -<p>“I’d like to know what it is, but I don’t want to -run any risk. If it’s a lion—”</p> - -<p>“There are no lions here, Frank. But it may be -a jaguar, and they are almost as dangerous.”</p> - -<p>“In that case we had better be careful. We don’t -want to be chewed up. Let us rest here in the open -for a bit and see if he comes this way.”</p> - -<p>This was agreed to, and sitting on a rock they -waited, each with his gun ready for use. Quarter of -an hour slipped by, which seemed much longer to -both boys. Then came a howling from the direction -of the river.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_269">[269]</span>“Those rascally monkeys are coming back!” exclaimed -Mark. “I hope they don’t come this way. -We might have lots of trouble with them if they -got to throwing stones at us.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, we can give them a shot or two if they do -that.”</p> - -<p>“They seem to be having quite a time of it along -the river. By ginger! do you think they’d bother -our canoe?”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps so! Let’s go down and see if the boat -is safe!”</p> - -<p>Much alarmed the two boys caught up the birds -they had shot and started down the hill on the back -trail. The road was plain so there was no danger -of getting lost. Mark ran ahead and was the first -to catch sight of the Orinoco at the spot where they -had left their craft.</p> - -<p>The sight that met his gaze filled him with dismay. -The shore was lined with howling monkeys -who filled the air with their noise. Out in the -stream were a score of the creatures on the canoe, -howling with equal vigor. The paddles to the craft -had been dropped overboard and the canoe was -floating at the mercy of the wind and current.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_270">[270]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXIX<br /> - -<small>LOST ON THE ORINOCO</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Well</span> did you ever see such impudent beggars!” -cried Mark, as Frank reached his side. “If they -haven’t gone and taken possession of our canoe!”</p> - -<p>“O Mark, we must get it back somehow!” ejaculated -Frank, aghast. “If we don’t, how will we ever -get back to camp?”</p> - -<p>“Of course we must get it back. But how to do -it I don’t know. Come, let us run down the stream -a bit and try to head them off.”</p> - -<p>Frank was willing enough to do anything which -might give them back the canoe and away they -started, as close to the bank of the stream as the -jungle permitted.</p> - -<p>But the way was dark and uncertain, for the sun -was now hanging over the forest to the westward, -and they had not gone far when Frank went into a -boggy hole up to his knees. As he sank his gun -went off, the charge luckily passing upward through -the tree branches.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_271">[271]</span>“What’s up?” called Mark, who had gone ahead -by a somewhat different route.</p> - -<p>“I’m in a hole! Help me out!”</p> - -<p>“I will!”</p> - -<p>Mark was soon at his chum’s side and Frank was -helped from the hole without much difficulty. But -his going down had disturbed a number of ugly -looking spiders and one of these bit him on the hand -before he could brush the creature away.</p> - -<p>“Ough!” cried the boy, for the pain was intense.</p> - -<p>“Did it bite you?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“Too bad! But come on, or those monkeys and -the canoe will be gone.”</p> - -<p>For the moment the bite of the spider, though -smarting hotly, was forgotten and side by side they -continued along the watercourse until they reached -an inlet. Close to the river this inlet was all of -fifty feet across and they had to make a long detour -in order to avoid the many bog holes with which it -was surrounded. All this took time and when they -reached the Orinoco again the canoe with its load -of monkeys was nowhere to be seen.</p> - -<p>“It’s gone!” burst out Mark. “I can’t see the -canoe anywhere.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_272">[272]</span>“Perhaps they are already around the bend,” suggested -Frank. “Let us try for a short cut. It’s -our only chance.”</p> - -<p>As he spoke he kept whipping his hand in the air, -showing the pain he was suffering. Already the -skin around the bite was beginning to swell.</p> - -<p>“It’s too bad, Frank,” said Mark, sympathetically. -“Put some soft mud on it. I’ve heard that is good -for bee and spider bites,” and his chum did as suggested. -This lessened the pain but the swelling -steadily continued.</p> - -<p>On they went through the jungle, keeping close together, -for here it was darker than ever. Both -thought they knew the course they were pursuing and -that they would regain the stream at a point half -a mile below where they had left it. They made no -allowance for the fact that it is the easiest thing in -the world to become completely turned around in -any dense mass of growth where one has to turn -this way and that in order to make progress of any -sort. Old hunters are often bothered even in woods -which they think they know thoroughly.</p> - -<p>A half mile was covered when both came to a halt -in dismay. Instead of sighting the Orinoco they<span class="pagenum" id="Page_273">[273]</span> -found before them a cliff of rocks twenty to thirty -feet in height.</p> - -<p>“Hullo, we’ve made a mistake!” burst out Mark.</p> - -<p>“The river can’t be in this direction,” answered -Frank. “We have got turned around somehow.”</p> - -<p>“Well, the river ought to be on our right.”</p> - -<p>“So it had. Let us turn in that direction.”</p> - -<p>Again they went on, fairly tearing their course -through the entangling vines and over the rough -roots of trees, sprawling in all directions.</p> - -<p>“I—I can’t go much further,” panted Frank. “I—I’m -out of wind.”</p> - -<p>“I’m pretty well blown myself,” was the reply. -“But we ought to be close to the river. Shall I go -ahead and look?”</p> - -<p>“No! no! don’t leave me!”</p> - -<p>Frank moved on again, tired as he was, and thus -several rods more were covered.</p> - -<p>“Water! The river!” cried Mark, and made a -wild dash forward. But alas! it was not the Orinoco -at all, only a long and shallow pool having apparently -no outlet. Around the pool were a big flock -of birds of every color imaginable, but the boys -never thought to fire into the game.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_274">[274]</span>“We are on the wrong tack again!” groaned -Mark. “I don’t believe the river is anywhere near -here.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, Mark, if that is so, we are lost!”</p> - -<p><i>Lost!</i> It was a horrifying word. Were they -really lost in that immense jungle, perhaps miles -away from where they had left their companions? -The face of each whitened and Frank sank down on -a tree root in despair.</p> - -<p>“Yes, we must be lost!” he murmured. “And if -we are, how will we ever find our way back to -camp?”</p> - -<p>“We must find our way back—we simply must!” -was Mark’s reply. “The river can’t be so very far -off.”</p> - -<p>“But the canoe is gone. We won’t get that back. -It must be miles from here by this time,” insisted -Frank.</p> - -<p>“Well, if it’s gone we’ll have to tramp back, that’s -all, Frank. I know it’s a long way, and not a very -inviting way either, but there is nothing else -to do.”</p> - -<p>The sun was now setting and the blackness of -night began to creep swiftly over the immense forest. -Still further alarmed, they pushed on until, without<span class="pagenum" id="Page_275">[275]</span> -warning, Frank fell headlong and lay like a log. -Mark raised him up and saw that the hand which had -been bitten by the spider was swollen to twice its -size and that the swelling was beginning to creep -up the arm.</p> - -<p>“He is poisoned, that’s all there is to that,” -thought Mark. “Perhaps it will kill him.”</p> - -<p>The thought of his chum dying there, on his hands, -in that lonely place, made him frantic. He tore off -the handkerchief Frank had placed on his hand and -brushed the soft mud from the bite. He had heard -how poison can sometimes be sucked from a wound -and now he set to work fearlessly, not thinking of -himself, but only praying mentally that the action -would restore Frank to consciousness.</p> - -<p>The hours of the night to follow were such that -Mark, if he lives a hundred years, will never forget. -After sucking the bite thoroughly, he plastered it -with fresh mud and bound it up again. Then, carrying -Frank to the edge of the pool, he lit a camp-fire, -to keep off any wild beasts that might be prowling -in the vicinity. He bathed his chum’s face and raised -him up. At first Frank did not respond to this -treatment but at last he opened his eyes and stared -around in bewilderment.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_276">[276]</span>“Frank! Frank! wake up!” cried Mark -“Please try to rouse yourself.”</p> - -<p>“Wha—what happened to me?” was the uncertain -question.</p> - -<p>“You fell unconscious, don’t you remember? I -guess it was the spider bite did it. Please rouse -up.” And as Frank tried to settle back once more -Mark shook him vigorously.</p> - -<p>It was all of two hours before Frank roused up -sufficiently to stand on his feet. His eyes were much -swollen and he felt sick at his stomach. But the -poison had now spent its force and from that time -on he grew gradually better. But the swelling of his -hand remained for several days.</p> - -<p>The night passed without sleep on Mark’s part, -for he was afraid to leave off watching Frank. To -pass the early morning hours, Mark dressed one of -the curassows, covered it with mud, as he had been -taught by Cubara, and placed it in the hot ashes of -the fire to bake. By the time the sun came up the -bird was done and to Mark it proved delicious eating, -although Frank declared he could taste nothing on -account of the poison still in his system.</p> - -<p>“I’m as weak as a rag,” declared the younger<span class="pagenum" id="Page_277">[277]</span> -boy. “When I stand up my legs fairly tremble -under me.”</p> - -<p>“Then we had better not attempt to do too much -to-day,” answered Mark, trying to speak cheerfully.</p> - -<p>“But we must get back to camp, Mark. What -will they think of our absence?”</p> - -<p>“I’m sure I don’t know. But getting back will -not be so easy. Remember, we must first locate -the river.”</p> - -<p>“We ought to be able to do that by the position -of the sun.”</p> - -<p>“I thought of that. But I’d rather climb up one -of these big trees and take a look around.”</p> - -<p>“All right,—if you can get up.” Frank gazed -along the trunk of one of the monsters. “It will be -no easy task.”</p> - -<p>“The vines will aid me,” answered Mark, and -made his preparations to ascend the tree without -further delay.</p> - -<p>As Frank had said, it was no easy task, and it was -fully quarter of an hour before Mark was half way -to the top of the giant of the jungle.</p> - -<p>“Can you see anything?” called up Frank.</p> - -<p>“Not yet, but I am getting on a level with the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_278">[278]</span> -trees around this one,” was the reply. Mark continued -to climb. It was now easier work, for at the -top of the tree the branches were closer together than -they were below.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah! the river!” came the cry. “Frank, we -are not so far away from it after all.”</p> - -<p>“In what direction?” demanded the younger -boy.</p> - -<p>“To the northward. We have become badly -turned around I can tell you.”</p> - -<p>“Do you see anything of the camp?”</p> - -<p>“No, that is too far off. But if we can only get -to the river bank we’ll be sure to strike the camp -sooner or later,” went on Mark. “I’ll come down as -soon——”</p> - -<p>Mark broke off short, as a peculiar noise just below -him caught his ear. Looking down he saw a -strange looking creature sitting on a branch, gazing -fiercely at him, a creature covered with black and -white quills and with a scaly tail that wound itself -several times around the branch behind it. The animal -was a coendoo, commonly called a South American -porcupine.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_279">[279]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXX<br /> - -<small>IN THE DEPTHS OF THE JUNGLE</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">Ordinarily</span> the South American porcupine or -coendoo is a timid animal, seeking cover by day -and hunting its food during the night. It lives upon -nuts, roots, herbs and leaves and, unlike other porcupines -which burrow in the ground, makes its -home, to a great extent, in the branches and hollows -of large trees.</p> - -<p>But though usually timid it is at times aroused -to great anger, especially when startled. Such was -now the case with the beast that confronted Mark. -Every quill, or spine, was raised to its fullest and -the porcupine emitted a strange hissing whistle -which bode the youth no good.</p> - -<p>Mark was startled, so much so that he slipped -from the branch upon which he stood and came -close to pitching to the ground head first. But he -caught another branch and with an effort swung -himself up to a sitting position.</p> - -<p>“Are you coming down?” called out Frank.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_280">[280]</span>“I can’t! Here’s a porcupine, or something like -it. He looks as if he was going to attack me.”</p> - -<p>As Mark spoke he felt in his pocket for his pistol -and brought the weapon forth. It was fully loaded -and he pointed it at the coendoo, which was now -moving slowly backward as though to prepare for a -leap upon him.</p> - -<p>Crack! went the pistol and the porcupine was -struck a glancing blow over the back. Then it made -its leap, landing on Mark’s breast!</p> - -<p>For the instant the youth was almost paralyzed -with fright. But mechanically he discharged his -pistol a second time and the bullet lodged in the -coendoo’s breast. With a howl of pain it fell back, -caught at the tree branch with its tail and missed -it, and went plunging out of sight into the foliage -and vines below.</p> - -<p>“Did you kill it?” called out Frank.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know. It fell down. Look out it don’t -come on your head,” answered Mark.</p> - -<p>Frank already had his gun in hand, ready to be -of service to his chum if possible. But the porcupine -failed to appear and he called back that it must still -be in the foliage of the tree.</p> - -<p>With great caution Mark descended one branch<span class="pagenum" id="Page_281">[281]</span> -after another. Presently he caught sight of the animal, -hanging from a limb by its tail, an appendage -which in the coendoo is unusually strong and long. -The beast was plainly dying but to make certain -Mark put another bullet through it. Then with the -butt of the pistol he unwound the tail and the carcass -fell to the ground with a thud.</p> - -<p>“That was a surprise party I didn’t expect,” said -Mark, when he was once more beside Frank. “How -he scared me when he leaped at me! See, his quills -drew blood,” and he showed the back of his pricked -hand.</p> - -<p>“Wonder if the porcupine is good eating?”</p> - -<p>“I’ve been told the meat is like that of a suckling -pig. We’ll skin him and take him along. Who -knows but what we may need the meat badly before -we get out of our mess.”</p> - -<p>It was a difficult task to skin the coendoo and it -caused them more than one wound. But at last -it was finished, and with their game over their -shoulders and their guns in hand, they started out in -the direction of the stream Mark had located from -the tree top.</p> - -<p>The day proved an extremely hot one and the -boys had not covered half the distance when they<span class="pagenum" id="Page_282">[282]</span> -found they had to sit down and rest. On all sides -was the trackless jungle: trees, bushes and vines, -with an occasional opening, where grew the most -gorgeous of ferns and flowers. Where the ground -was damp, monstrous toadstools reared their umbrella-like -heads and the moss was six to eight inches -deep. Insects of a hundred varieties were numerous -and among them crawled lizards and other small -creatures for which they could find no name. Orchids -abounded, some entwining around the trees -to a great height. The odor was so strong at times -as to be positively sickening.</p> - -<p>“They say that some of these orchids can put -you in a sleep from which you will never awaken,” -said Mark. “I don’t know if it’s true or not, but -if we have to sleep in the open another night let us -take good care to keep away from anything that -smells as strong as that plant yonder.”</p> - -<p>“I heard the professor tell that one orchid produces -vanilla,” said Frank. “He said there were -over three thousand varieties of the plant.”</p> - -<p>Again the forward march was resumed and when -both were almost too tired to fight their way another -step a river came into sight, flowing lazily along in -the sultry daylight. Both looked at the water for a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_283">[283]</span> -minute in silence then turned to each other in perplexity.</p> - -<p>“It doesn’t look like the Orinoco,” declared -Frank. “At least, not like the part just above the -camp.”</p> - -<p>“Exactly what I was thinking, Frank. I believe -we’ve struck another stream entirely.”</p> - -<p>“Then we are worse lost than we were before.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps not. This may be a tributary of the -Orinoco. If so, by following this we are bound to -find the Orinoco itself sooner or later.”</p> - -<p>“True, but this may flow along for miles before -it joins the Orinoco, and if it does join that stream, -the question is: Does it join above or below the -camp?”</p> - -<p>“I’m sure I can’t answer that question, now. The -only thing we can do is to follow this stream and -trust to luck.”</p> - -<p>“If only we had a canoe!”</p> - -<p>“True, but we haven’t one, and no tools with -which to even make a raft. We’ll have to keep on -hoofing it, as the saying goes.”</p> - -<p>They had brought with them the remains of the -baked curassow and on this they now proceeded to -make a dinner. Both longed for some bread and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_284">[284]</span> -vegetables. They were afraid to touch the berries -and other things growing around them for fear of -being poisoned.</p> - -<p>By throwing some brushwood into the stream they -soon made certain of the direction of the current -and this accomplished set off once more, after washing -down the fowl meat with the coolest drink of -water they could find. Fortunately the bank of the -stream was tolerably clear of bushes so they made -much more rapid progress than before.</p> - -<p>“I have an idea,” said Frank, as they moved -around a bend into which a mass of driftwood had -collected. “Do you see yonder tree trunk, caught -in the mud? Why can’t we shove that out into the -water and take a ride? It will rest us, and I think -the trunk will move just about as fast as we can -walk, when once it gets started.”</p> - -<p>“I’m willing to try it,” answered Mark, and they -set to work to dislodge the tree, which looked as if -it had been in the water for some time. Once loose -they sprang “aboard,” as Frank called it, and shoved -into the stream proper. Caught by the current the -tree trunk swung along the surface of the watercourse -more rapidly than they had anticipated.</p> - -<p>“This is something like,” cried Frank, seating<span class="pagenum" id="Page_285">[285]</span> -himself on one of the upmost branches. “It’s every -bit as good as a canoe.”</p> - -<p>“If it don’t take a notion to turn over and dump -us into the stream,” answered Mark. “It seems to -me it’s a little shaky.”</p> - -<p>Nevertheless, he, too, was satisfied and sitting side -by side they allowed the tree to carry them down the -river. Soon several miles were covered and then -they noticed that the watercourse was growing narrower -and that the current was correspondingly -stronger.</p> - -<p>“My, but we are flying along now,” remarked -Frank.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps we had better try to steer the tree into -shore,” returned Mark. “I don’t like this increase -in speed. We may be drifting toward some rapids or -a waterfall.”</p> - -<p>He had hardly spoken when the tree whirled -around, almost sending both in the water. As they -clutched at the branches they felt the speed increase. -The river was now not more than a quarter of its -former width and the water foamed up here and -there, showing that there were rocks not far below -the surface. Rocks could also be seen along the -shores and presently they passed a tall cliff filled<span class="pagenum" id="Page_286">[286]</span> -with birds, the flock swooping off in several directions -at their approach.</p> - -<p>“I hear water falling ahead!” ejaculated Frank. -“Hark!”</p> - -<p>“Yes! yes! We are coming to a waterfall!” -burst out Mark. “Let us try to turn the tree into -shore by all means. If we don’t we may be -drowned!”</p> - -<p>Each had a tree branch in his hand, with which -he had been trying to paddle from time to time. -Now both endeavored to use the tree branches as -rudders, but in a trice Mark’s was caught in some -rocks and torn from his grasp. A second later the -tree bounced up and spun around, throwing the boys -flat among the branches. Dazed and bewildered they -clung fast, fearing that the next lurch of the tree -would send them into the stream, which now foamed -and boiled on all sides of them.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_287">[287]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXXI<br /> - -<small>HOCKLEY AND THE BOA-CONSTRICTOR</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">It</span> is high time the boys came back.”</p> - -<p>So spoke Professor Strong, on the evening following -the departure of Frank and Mark up the Orinoco. -It was after nine o’clock, and all was silent -around the camp save for the distant cries of the -night birds and the howling of the monkeys. The -professor stood on the edge of the bluff, gazing -anxiously through the gloom that overhung the broad -watercourse.</p> - -<p>“It is odd they are not back,” said Darry, who -was close at hand. “I hope no harm has befallen -them.”</p> - -<p>Hockley had already thrown himself down in -the tent and was fast asleep, despite a plague of gnats -which had but recently put in an appearance. Sam -sat by the fire sewing up a hole he had torn in his -jacket. The Indian was at the water’s edge, fishing -with a net he had made of braided vines.</p> - -<p>As the time slipped by Professor Strong, Darry<span class="pagenum" id="Page_288">[288]</span> -and Sam grew more anxious and none of them felt -like going to sleep. The Indian came in and threw -himself down and then the others sat down to talk -in whispers.</p> - -<p>By daybreak the professor had made up his mind -to go after the missing ones. He decided to take Cubara -with him, leaving the others to watch the camp.</p> - -<p>“If I find the boys I’ll be back before dinner -time,” said Professor Strong. “If not, I won’t return -until they are found.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I’m sure I hope you have quick luck,” said -Sam. “We’ll be very anxious until you return.”</p> - -<p>Soon the professor and the Indian were out of -sight and the boys turned back to put the camp in -order. Hockley threw himself on a rock, declining -to take a hand in the work.</p> - -<p>“You ought to do your share,” said Sam. “It’s -not fair to expect us to do everything.”</p> - -<p>“You shut up!” cried Hockley. “I’ll do as I -please. If you say a word I’ll pitch into you!”</p> - -<p>He was in an ill humor and spoiling for a fight, as -Darry and Sam could readily see. Yet Sam was -not daunted.</p> - -<p>“It’s not fair, Hockley. Everybody ought to do -his share of the work,” he went on.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_289">[289]</span>“Oh, leave him alone, Beans,” came from Darry. -“We can’t stop him from being lazy.”</p> - -<p>The words had scarcely been uttered when the -angry youth, caught up a billet of wood and flung -it at Darry. It struck the lad in the shoulder hurting -him not a little. Darry rushed at him, but leaping -up with a club in his hands, Hockley stood on -guard.</p> - -<p>“Leave me alone!” he exclaimed. “The first -of you to get too close will get a crack with this.”</p> - -<p>“Let us both pitch into him,” came from Sam. -“He ought to have a first-class thrashing.”</p> - -<p>“You let me alone!” howled Hockley. “Don’t -you dare to touch me!”</p> - -<p>“Drop that club,” came from Darry. “Drop it, -I say, or Sam and I will certainly pitch into you -and you’ll get more than you want.”</p> - -<p>“I—I won’t drop the club until you promise to let -me alone.”</p> - -<p>“Why did you fling that piece of wood at me?”</p> - -<p>“You hadn’t any right to jaw at me.”</p> - -<p>“It was your business to do your share of the -work here.”</p> - -<p>A war of words followed, and in the end Hockley -dropped the club and consented to do some of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_290">[290]</span> -work. As soon as it was finished, he picked up his -gun and started to move off.</p> - -<p>“Where are you going?” demanded Darry. “The -professor told us to remain here until he got back.”</p> - -<p>“I’m going down the river a bit. I reckon there’s -no harm in that,” answered Hockley and without -waiting for further argument he strode away and -was soon lost to sight in the jungle.</p> - -<p>“He wouldn’t go off like that if he wasn’t boiling -mad,” observed Sam.</p> - -<p>After cleaning up the two boys started in to fish, -there being nothing else by which to while away the -time. But biting was not lively, and after half an -hour of only fair success they walked up the bluff -again. They had just reached the tent when they -heard a gunshot, followed by a yell of fright.</p> - -<p>“That’s Hockley!” ejaculated Darry. “He has -stirred up something and it has scared him to death.”</p> - -<p>“Help! help!” came faintly to their ears. -“Help!”</p> - -<p>“We had better go and see what is the matter,” -said Sam, and caught up a rifle. Darry had already -reached for a shotgun, and thus armed both boys -sped down the bluff again and in the direction from -whence the cries proceeded.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_291">[291]</span>They had not far to go. Beyond the bend of the -stream was an inlet and back of this a somewhat -open glade, bordered by half a dozen low-drooping -rubber trees. Among these trees stood Hockley, -fairly paralyzed with terror and close at hand, -swinging from a branch, was a boa-constrictor all of -fifteen feet in length.</p> - -<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/p290.jpg" alt="" /></div> -<p class="caption">“Help! save me!” screamed the unfortunate youth.</p> - -<p>“Oh, what a snake!” burst out Darry, and then -stood still, hardly knowing whether to proceed or -not.</p> - -<p>Sam said nothing, but brought his rifle to his -shoulder, took quick aim and pulled the trigger. The -bullet sped true and buried itself in the boa-constrictor’s -neck.</p> - -<p>The shot awakened Darry to action and now he -too blazed away, peppering the big snake in the head -and body. The second shot from his gun was at -close range and fairly tore a piece of skin from the -huge reptile’s neck.</p> - -<p>But a boa-constrictor is not easily killed, and -though badly wounded it yet had a great deal of -fight in it. Still holding to the tree branch with its -tail it shot forth its body and in an instant had Hockley -by the waist.</p> - -<p>“Help! save me!” screamed the unfortunate<span class="pagenum" id="Page_292">[292]</span> -youth. “Oh, please save me! Don’t let him crush -me to pieces!”</p> - -<p>In an agony of fear he tried to pull himself loose, -but without avail. The snake lifted him up from -the ground with ease, intending doubtless to crush -him to a jelly on the tree trunk.</p> - -<p>But now Sam rushed as close as had Darry. The -rifle was a repeating weapon—one of the best the -party possessed—and shoving it at the snake’s head -the youth let drive twice in quick succession. Then, -without waiting to see the effect of these shots, he put -two additional bullets in the boa-constrictor’s body. -The reptile quivered from head to tail then remained -motionless.</p> - -<p>It was an anxious moment and the hearts of all -three boys seemed to stop beating. Hockley tried to -call out, but could not, for the boa-constrictor was -fairly crushing in his ribs.</p> - -<p>But after that moment had passed the boys saw -that they had won the battle. The head of the boa-constrictor -dropped and the muscles of the huge body -relaxed. Then Hockley slipped to the damp earth -and slowly the reptile’s body dropped on top of -him.</p> - -<p>“He must be dead,” whispered Darry, hoarsely,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_293">[293]</span> -and with his gun started to release Hockley from the -loathsome weight. Sam assisted, and soon they had -him free and was dragging him out of harm’s way. -From a safe distance they watched the boa-constrictor -and at last felt certain that it was dead.</p> - -<p>“He’s in a bad way,” said Sam, leaning over -Hockley. The youth lay in a heap, totally unconscious -and breathing with difficulty.</p> - -<p>“It was awful,” returned Darry. “What a close -shave! Let us take him down to the river and bathe -his face.”</p> - -<p>They did as suggested, but even this failed to revive -Hockley. Then Darry ran back to the camp -for some medicine which was administered with care. -But it was fully an hour before Hockley opened his -eyes.</p> - -<p>“Take him off!” he moaned. “Take the horrible -thing off!”</p> - -<p>“You’re safe now, Hockley,” said Darry, kindly. -“The boa-constrictor is dead.” But Hockley was -now out of his mind and did not understand, and -he continued to plead most piteously that they save -him from being crushed to death.</p> - -<p>“We’ll have to carry him back to camp,” said -Sam, and this was done. It was no easy task to get<span class="pagenum" id="Page_294">[294]</span> -the hurt one up the bluff. Once in camp they fixed -Hockley a soft bed and did all they could to make him -otherwise comfortable.</p> - -<p>“I never want to see another boa-constrictor, not -even in a menagerie,” declared Sam. “I’ll dream -of that thing for a week.”</p> - -<p>The boys remained in camp after that. It was -nightfall before Hockley came to his senses and -then he complained of a severe pain in the chest. -They uncovered him and rubbed him down with liniment.</p> - -<p>“Is it dead?” he asked. “How did you kill it?” -And when they told him he shook his head slowly, -as if in wonder. Later on he called them both to -him. “I’m much obliged for what you did,” he -said humbly. “It was great. I shan’t forget it. -I’m sorry we had the row.”</p> - -<p>“So am I sorry,” returned Sam, and Darry -nodded to show he agreed. “We can’t afford to -quarrel out here, Jake. We may need each other’s -help, eh?”</p> - -<p>“That’s just what I was thinking. I guess I was -a big fool to start it anyway. Let’s call it off, will -you?”</p> - -<p>“Certainly!” cried Darry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_295">[295]</span>“With all my heart,” came from Sam.</p> - -<p>Hockley took the hand of each and pressed it -briefly. He looked one and the other in the eyes -and then his gaze dropped. “All right, we’ll be -friends,” he said, in a lower voice than ever.</p> - -<p>Nobody felt like talking after this. Darry started -up the fire and got out some things for dinner. Sam -brought up the fish and cleaned them. Hockley -turned over on his back and dozed away, occasionally -uttering a low groan. Yet every one of the lads felt -better because of what had just passed.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_296">[296]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXXII<br /> - -<small>A PEEP AT GOLD AND SILVER MINES</small></h2> -</div> - -<p>“<span class="smcap">The</span> tree is caught fast!”</p> - -<p>“I know it, Frank, but I don’t think it will stay -caught for long!”</p> - -<p>What the two chums said was true—the tree had -caught in the boiling and foaming water, directly in -the middle of the stream. The spray was flying all -about them, so that they could scarcely make out -what was ahead. But they heard a noise that could -mean but one thing. A waterfall was there, dashing -with a roar over the rocks and falling into a big -pool below.</p> - -<p>A minute went by. The tree was swinging around -slowly. Now it began to grate along the rocks. Of -a sudden an end bobbed up and then the tree was free, -and on it rushed for the waterfall.</p> - -<p>“We are going over!” shrieked Frank, and held -fast, not knowing exactly why. Mark tried to -answer, but the roar all around them drowned out -every other sound.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_297">[297]</span>On they went for a hundred yards, between rocks -standing up higher than their heads. Then the -brink of the waterfall was gained and here the tree -seemed to pause for a moment. Over it went, carrying -the boys with it, over and down, out of the sunlight -into utter darkness.</p> - -<p>By instinct more than reason both boys clung fast -to the tree and that was their salvation. Down they -went into the pool and the torrent of water came on -top of them, sending them far beneath the surface. -How long they remained under they could not tell, -afterward, but it seemed an age. When they came -up each was more dead than alive. But still they -clung to the tree as it drifted away and lodged among -the rocks a short distance further down the river.</p> - -<p>“Frank, are you all right?” Mark asked the question, -feebly, some ten minutes later.</p> - -<p>“I—I guess so,” was the gasped out answer. -“But, oh, Mark, wasn’t it an awful tumble?”</p> - -<p>“That’s what it was, Frank. I didn’t think we’d -come out of it alive.”</p> - -<p>They left the tree and sat down on the rocks, and -there rested for over an hour. The noise of the -waterfall still thundered in their ears, but otherwise -all was silent.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_298">[298]</span>At last Mark arose and stretched himself. “If -we are all right we may as well go on again,” he -said.</p> - -<p>“On the tree?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. I don’t think there is any danger of another -waterfall—at least not close by. We can watch -the water and if the current gets too swift we can -turn into shore before the tree gets beyond our -control again.”</p> - -<p>So it was agreed, and soon they were on the way -once more. Below the falls the river was narrow -for several miles but the current was not very swift, -for much of the water was carried off by side -streams flowing in various directions.</p> - -<p>“We don’t seem to be getting to the Orinoco very -fast,” observed Frank, after all of five miles had -been covered. “I’ll wager we are at least twenty -to thirty miles from camp.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps we are. But what do you advise? We -can’t sit down here and suck our thumbs.”</p> - -<p>“Hark! What was that? A gunshot?”</p> - -<p>“It sounded more like a distant explosion,” -cried Mark, leaping to his feet. “There it goes -again. An explosion sure enough. What can it -mean?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_299">[299]</span>“I think I know,” answered Frank. “It means -that we are near some kind of a mine. That was the -blasting of rocks.”</p> - -<p>“I hope you are right, Frank. It came from down -the river, didn’t it?”</p> - -<p>“It did. Let us go on. There may be a regular -miners’ camp below here.”</p> - -<p>Once more they allowed their improvised craft to -drift down the stream. The character of the country -was changing, and presently they found themselves -hemmed in by high rocky walls. Then came -a bend eastward and they came in sight of a small -settlement. There were a dozen houses built of -timber covered with corrugated iron, and a small -engine house with a tall iron smokestack. Back of -the settlement were the openings to several gold and -silver mines. As they approached another explosion -rent the air and they saw a large section of a cliff -give way and fall to the rocks below.</p> - -<p>There were several boats tied up to a tiny dock -running along the river, and the men on these gazed -curiously at the boys as they drifted up and leaped -aboard one of the craft.</p> - -<p>“Where come you from?” demanded one of the -men, in Spanish.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_300">[300]</span>“We are American,” said Mark. “Can you -speak English?”</p> - -<p>“Americans, eh?” put in another man. “I’m -an American myself. How did you get on that -tree?”</p> - -<p>“It’s a long story,” answered Mark. “We were -with a party along the Orinoco but we went ashore -and got lost. Are we far from that river?”</p> - -<p>“Eight miles. You look pretty wet.”</p> - -<p>“We came over the falls.”</p> - -<p>“Gee whiz! It’s a wonder you are alive!” burst -out the American, whose name was Simon Smither. -“Come ashore, and I’ll take you to the boss. This -place is Castroville. Maybe you’ve heard of it. We -have here the Little Bolivar and the Moonlight -Mines, two of the best payers in this section of the -country.”</p> - -<p>“Castroville!” ejaculated Frank. He remembered -that Andy Hume had once mentioned the place -to him. “Is there a newcomer here by the name -of Andy Hume?”</p> - -<p>“There is. He’s up to the office now. So you -know him?”</p> - -<p>“We do,” answered Mark, and then told their -story while the whole party hurried from the river<span class="pagenum" id="Page_301">[301]</span> -to where the offices of the mines were located, not -far from the engine house.</p> - -<p>Andy Hume saw them coming and leaped up from -a stool to receive them. “I declare,” he cried. -“Where did you come from? Thought you were -hunting and fishing along the Orinoco.”</p> - -<p>“We were,” answered Frank, and told of how -they had become lost and of what had followed. -“We must get back as soon as we can,” he added. -“The professor and the others will be much worried -over our absence.”</p> - -<p>The matter was talked over, and by consulting one -of the managers of the mines they obtained permission -to use one of the boats, taking with them a -native boatman who knew all the rivers of the -vicinity thoroughly.</p> - -<p>“He’ll get you back safe and sound,” said Andy -Hume. “He’s a first rate fellow. He brought me -here from Navaleno, forty miles away.”</p> - -<p>“But how did you happen to come here?” questioned -Mark. “I thought you were going prospecting?”</p> - -<p>“So I was, but at Navaleno I met an old miner -friend of mine, Captain Richards. He has an interest -here and he wants me to look after it while he<span class="pagenum" id="Page_302">[302]</span> -takes a trip to the States. So I’m booked here at a -salary of two hundred dollars per month and found. -Not so bad that, eh?” And the boys agreed that -the arrangement was certainly very promising.</p> - -<p>A comfortable meal and a chance to dry their -clothing made both boys feel much better. While -they were eating they asked a number of questions -about the mines and when they had finished Andy -Hume insisted upon showing them around.</p> - -<p>“The output of these mines will be about six hundred -thousand dollars this year,” he said. “To get -out the gold and silver will cost the combined companies -about two hundred thousand dollars, leaving -a profit to the stockholders of four hundred thousand -dollars. We have here all the latest machinery -with the exception of a newly-patented quartz -crusher which is now being built for us in the -United States. At first the mining around here was -what is commonly called cradling or placer mining,—that -is, the miners would pick up what they could -find on the surface or by ordinary digging—but that -is past and all we get has to be blasted out of the -mountains.”</p> - -<p>An hour was spent in and around the mines, inspecting -the shafts and the various machines for extracting<span class="pagenum" id="Page_303">[303]</span> -the gold and silver. Then the boatman -came up to announce that the boat was ready and -they started to leave.</p> - -<p>As they did so a strange boat, containing several -passengers, arrived at the dock close at hand. As -the passengers came toward where Frank and Mark -were standing, the latter plucked the former hurriedly -by the sleeve.</p> - -<p>“See there, Frank,” he whispered.</p> - -<p>Frank looked in the direction and gave a start.</p> - -<p>“Why it’s that Dan Markel, the fellow who -robbed Hockley!” he ejaculated.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_304">[304]</span> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXXIII<br /> - -<small>TOGETHER AGAIN—CONCLUSION</small></h2> -</div> - -<p><span class="smcap">The</span> two boys were much surprised by the unexpected -appearance of the man from Baltimore and -for the moment knew not what to say or do.</p> - -<p>“Do you know one of those men?” asked Andy -Hume.</p> - -<p>“Yes, that one,” answered Mark, pointing out the -wrong-doer. “His name is Dan Markel, and he -robbed Jacob Hockley of his watch and nearly all of -his money.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t say! Then he won’t be the fellow we -want here.”</p> - -<p>By this time Markel was close at hand. Now for -the first time he caught sight of the boys and he -halted in dismay.</p> - -<p>“So we’ve met again,” said Mark, coldly.</p> - -<p>“Why—er—how are you?” stammered the man -from Baltimore. He knew not what to say.</p> - -<p>“I suppose you’ve got Jake Hockley’s watch with<span class="pagenum" id="Page_305">[305]</span> -you,” put in Frank. “If you have, you had better -pass it over to us.”</p> - -<p>“You—er—you talk in riddles,” returned Markel. -“I know nothing of his watch excepting that it was -taken from him while in a crowd.”</p> - -<p>“You took the watch yourself, Mr. Markel,” put -in Mark, boldly. “And what is more, you sent for -his valise and robbed that. It is utterly useless for -you to deny it. If there is any officer in this settlement -I shall have you arrested.”</p> - -<p>At this the man from Baltimore turned pale. He -started as if to run away, then saw how hopeless -such a move would be and held his ground.</p> - -<p>The talk had attracted a crowd, which included -the general manager of the mining settlement, Mr. -John Brisbam. He now demanded to know what it -meant, and, with many interruptions from Markel, -Mark and Frank told of the Hockley affair and of -what had occurred at Macuto.</p> - -<p>“We can prove all we say, if you’ll only give us a -little time,” added Mark. “As soon as I can find -my friends again I’ll bring them here. In the meantime -I would like this man placed under arrest.”</p> - -<p>“Arrest! Not much!” howled Dan Markel. “It—it’s -an outrage! I am an honest American citizen<span class="pagenum" id="Page_306">[306]</span> -and I demand protection. There is a great mistake. -I am not the person they are after.”</p> - -<p>“Do you mind being searched?” asked Andy -Hume, shrewdly.</p> - -<p>“You have no right to touch me!” returned the -man from Baltimore in increased alarm.</p> - -<p>A war of words, which nearly came to blows followed, -but in the end Dan Markel was marched into -one of the offices of the mining company. Here his -pockets were examined and from one was taken -Hockley’s watch.</p> - -<p>“There are Hockley’s initials,” said Mark, pointing -them out. “J. A. H. don’t stand for Daniel -Markel.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right they don’t,” came from Andy -Hume. “He’s a black sheep sure as you’re born. -All this money must belong to Hockley, too,” he -added, counting up a quantity of gold and silver -amounting to nearly three hundred dollars. The -balance of the funds had already been squandered by -the man from Baltimore.</p> - -<p>Dan Markel raved and even swore at the treatment -he received, and in the end he was handcuffed. The -watch and money were placed in Mr. Brisbam’s -hands for safe keeping, and the prisoner was marched<span class="pagenum" id="Page_307">[307]</span> -to one of the houses and a guard set, in order that -he might not escape.</p> - -<p>A little later Mark and Frank set off with the -native boatman for the camp on the Orinoco. It -was already growing dark, but the native knew the -course well, so there was no danger of going astray.</p> - -<p>“I see the camp-fire!” cried Frank, when they -were yet half a mile off. “How good it looks! -Almost like home!”</p> - -<p>“I feel as if we had been away an age,” returned -Mark. “I can tell you I don’t want to get lost -again.”</p> - -<p>“You are right, Mark; the very word is enough -to give one the shivers.”</p> - -<p>As they drew closer they set up a loud shout, -which was presently answered by Sam and Darry, -who came rushing down to the water’s edge to receive -them.</p> - -<p>“We had almost given you up,” said Darry. -“Where in the world have you been?”</p> - -<p>“We’ve been further than we intended to go,” -answered Mark. “Where is the professor and the -others?”</p> - -<p>“The professor and Cubara are out looking for -you. Hockley is in the tent. He fell in with a boa-constrictor<span class="pagenum" id="Page_308">[308]</span> -and the snake nearly crushed him to -death.”</p> - -<p>“We’ve got news for him—news he’ll be glad to -hear,” said Frank.</p> - -<p>All walked up the bluff to the camp-fire and there -each told his story. In the midst of the recitals -Hockley roused up. He could scarcely believe his -ears when listening to what Mark and Frank had to -tell concerning Dan Markel.</p> - -<p>“I’m glad you collared him,” he said, faintly. -“I didn’t mind the money so much, but I hated to -part with the watch. What will you do next? I -can’t go over to that mining camp yet. I’m too -sore.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll see what the professor says,” said Mark.</p> - -<p>The professor and the Indian came in a short -while later. They had been up and down the river -for miles and were thoroughly disheartened. When -Professor Strong saw Frank and Mark he was overjoyed -and could scarcely keep from hugging them.</p> - -<p>“I was so afraid you had met your death in the -jungle I knew not what to do,” he said. “I did not -sleep a wink last night. We picked up your trail -twice and lost it. We found the canoe and that led -me to think that perhaps you were drowned.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_309">[309]</span>“We have had adventures enough to last us a -year,” returned Mark. “I can tell you a life in the -jungle is all well enough to read about, but in -reality it isn’t half so pleasant as one imagines.”</p> - -<p>It was arranged that all hands should move to the -mining settlement the next afternoon, starting after -the sun had spent its force for the day. Hockley -was to be made comfortable in Cubara’s recovered -canoe, with the professor to wait on him, while the -other boys made the passage in the craft brought -from Castroville.</p> - -<p>The next morning was a busy one, for there were -many things to pack up. Sam, Darry, Mark and -Frank went out for a last hunt, taking Cubara with -them. They brought in several peccaries and a score -of birds, including two beautiful Venezuelan trumpeters, -which they had found wading in a pool half -a mile distant from the Orinoco.</p> - -<p>“This ends our outing tour in Venezuela I suppose,” -said Frank. “Well, I am not sorry. We -have still a good deal of ground to cover and we -can’t afford to spend too much time in one place.”</p> - -<p>Four o’clock of the next day saw them embarking -at the foot of the bluff. They had carried Hockley -to the canoe and now the disabled youth was placed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_310">[310]</span> -on a grassy cushion which would add to the comfort -of the boat ride.</p> - -<p>“Good-bye to the camp!” cried Darry, as the -boats left the shore. “More than likely we’ll never -see the place again. Good-bye!” And the others -echoed the words. Soon the turn in the river hid the -locality from their view.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>A few words more and we will bring to a close -this story of sight seeing and adventures in Venezuela.</p> - -<p>When our friends reached Castroville a surprise -awaited them. Despite the guard which had been -set, Dan Markel had escaped through the night, -stolen one of the small boats on the river, and departed -for parts unknown. A search lasting two -hours had been instituted but had proved of no -avail.</p> - -<p>“We followed him down the stream to where there -are several forks,” said Andy Hume. “He took to -one of them, but which one we don’t know.”</p> - -<p>“But he didn’t take any of my stuff with him, did -he?” was Hockley’s anxious question.</p> - -<p>“No, he escaped with nothing but his clothing and -a pistol he stole from his guard.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_311">[311]</span>“Then let him go,” returned the lank youth. “I -never want to see him again.”</p> - -<p>“I think myself it is just as well,” said Professor -Strong. “To prosecute him would put us to a great -deal of trouble. If he hasn’t a cent he will have a -hard enough time of it getting along down here.”</p> - -<p>“Right you are,” said Andy Hume. “I’ll wager -he’ll bitterly regret that he ever left the States.”</p> - -<p>When Hockley received his things back he wished -to reward Frank and Mark for what they had done, -but the two boys would not listen to this. Then he -said that he was very grateful and hoped that they -should be friends in the future.</p> - -<p>“I’ve made up with Darry and Beans,” he said to -Frank and Mark. “And I want to make up with -you, too.”</p> - -<p>“All right, it suits me!” answered Frank, readily, -and Mark also agreed, and they shook hands.</p> - -<p>There was an empty house in the mining settlement -and this was turned over to our friends temporarily, -and here Hockley rested until he felt once -more like himself. During this time the other boys -made a number of trips up into the mountains, viewing -other mines of lesser importance. Thus several -weeks slipped by.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_312">[312]</span>“All told we’ve had some pretty good times here,” -declared Mark to the other boys, one day. “I hope -we have as good in our future travels.” His wish -was fulfilled, and how will be related in another -volume of this series.</p> - -<p>In this tale we will not only meet all of our friends -again, but also Dan Markel and learn something of -what became of the fellow after he left Castroville, -and of how he plotted fresh trouble for those who -had exposed him.</p> - -<p>And now for the present let us bid Professor -Strong and our young friends adieu. We have followed -them in an interesting trip from one end of -Venezuela to the other, have visited the capital and -other important cities, and have gone with them up -the Orinoco and into the jungle. Our friends have -had numerous adventures and have been in several -positions of more or less peril. But all has turned -out well, and here we will say good-bye.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="ph3">WAR AND ADVENTURE STORIES.</p> - -<p class="ph1">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER.</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Author of the Famous “Old Glory Series,” “Bound to Succeed Series,” -“Ship and Shore Series,” etc.</i></p> -</div> - -<p class="center"><span class="smcap">First Volume.</span></p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p class="center"><b><span class="large">BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON</span> Or Two Boys’ Adventures -in South Africa.</b></p> - -<p class="center">Illustrated by <span class="smcap">A. B. Shute</span>.</p> - -<p class="center">Cloth. <span class="gap"> 354 pages.</span> <span class="gap"> Price, $1.25.</span></p> - -<p>“The story bristles with action.”—<i>The Outlook.</i></p> - -<p>“A stirring story of the South African war.”—<i>The Journal</i>, Indianapolis, -Ind.</p> - -<p>“The kind of story to please boys and give them a fair idea of a great -historical event.”—<i>St. Louis Post-Despatch.</i></p> - -<p>“Throughout the book there is evidence of that sympathy for the Boer -which prevails on this side of the Atlantic.”—<i>Chronicle</i>, Chicago.</p> -</div> - -<hr class="tiny" /> - -<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Second Volume.</span></p> -<div class="blockquot"> -<p class="center"><b><span class="large">ON TO PEKIN</span> Or Old Glory in China.</b></p> - -<p class="center">Illustrated by <span class="smcap">A. B. Shute</span>.</p> - -<p class="center">Cloth. <span class="gap"> 330 pages.</span><span class="gap"> Price, $1.25.</span></p> - -<p>“Parents can feel, in putting this book into the hands of boys and girls, -that they are going to get and hold the interest by the strenuous adventure, -and at the same time enforce those splendid old-fashioned traits of honesty, -courage, and true all-round manliness.”—<i>Universalist Leader.</i></p> - -<p>“A thoroughly up-to-date book, full of incidents familiar to us, which will -suit the boys as well as be of interest to their parents.”—<i>San Francisco Call.</i></p> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="ph3">AMERICAN BOYS’ BIOGRAPHICAL -SERIES</p> - -<p class="ph1">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> -</div> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p><span class="large"><b>AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY.</b></span> Illustrated -by <span class="smcap">A. B. Shute</span>, and from photographs.</p> - -<p class="center">Cloth. <span class="gap"> 320 pages.</span><span class="gap"> Price $1.25.</span></p> - -<p>No more timely or patriotic book can be found than -Mr. Stratemeyer’s biography of our late martyred President.</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Another volume in preparation.</i></p> -</div> - -<hr class="tiny" /> - -<p class="ph3">COLONIAL SERIES</p> - -<p class="ph1">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p><span class="large"><b>WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST</b>;</span> Or, A Soldier Boy’s -Battles in the Wilderness.</p> - -<p class="center">Cloth. <span class="gap"> Illustrated.</span><span class="gap"> Price $1.25.</span></p> - -<p>“A thoroughly entertaining book.”—<i>N.Y. World.</i></p> - -<p><span class="large"><b>MARCHING ON NIAGARA</b>;</span> Or, The Soldier Boy of the Old -Frontier. (<i>In press.</i>)</p> -</div> - -<hr class="tiny" /> - -<p class="ph3">THE FAMOUS “OLD GLORY SERIES.”</p> - -<p class="ph1">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER,</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Author of “The Bound to Succeed Series,” “The Ship and Shore Series,” etc.</i></p> - -<p class="center"> -Six volumes. <span class="gap"> Cloth.</span><span class="gap"> Illustrated.</span></p> - -<p class="center">Price per volume, $1.25.</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p><span class="large"><b>UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA Or the War Fortunes of -a Castaway.</b></span></p> - -<p><span class="large"><b>A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA Or Fighting for the -Single Star.</b></span></p> - -<p><span class="large"><b>FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS Or Under Schley on -the Brooklyn.</b></span></p> - -<p><span class="large"><b>UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES Or a Young Officer -in the Tropics.</b></span></p> - -<p><span class="large"><b>THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE Or Under Lawton -through Luzon.</b></span></p> - -<p><span class="large"><b>UNDER MacARTHUR IN LUZON Or the Last Battle in -the Philippines.</b></span></p> - -<hr class="tiny" /> -<p>“A boy once addicted to Stratemeyer stays by him.”—<i>The Living Church.</i></p> - -<p>“The boys’ delight—the ‘Old Glory Series.’”—<i>The Christian Advocate</i>, -New York.</p> - -<p>“Stratemeyer’s style suits the boys.”—<span class="smcap">John Terhune</span>, <i>Supt. of Public -Instruction</i>, Bergen Co., New Jersey.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Stratemeyer is in a class by himself when it comes to writing about -American heroes, their brilliant doings on land and sea.”—<i>Times</i>, Boston.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Stratemeyer has written a series of books which, while historically -correct and embodying the most important features of the Spanish-American -War and the rebellion of the Filipinos, are sufficiently interwoven with -fiction to render them most entertaining to young readers.”—<i>The Call</i>, San -Francisco.</p> -</div> - -<hr class="tiny" /> -<p class="ph3">THE BOUND TO SUCCEED SERIES</p> - -<p class="ph1">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER,</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Author of “Under Dewey at Manila,” etc.</i></p> - -<p class="center">Three Volumes. <span class="gap"> Cloth.</span><span class="gap"> Illustrated. </span><span class="gap"> Price per volume, $1.00.</span></p> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p><span class="large"><b>RICHARD DARE’S VENTURE Or Striking Out for -Himself.</b></span></p> - -<p><span class="large"><b>OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH Or The Mystery of -a Mine.</b></span></p> - -<p><span class="large"><b>TO ALASKA FOR GOLD Or The Fortune Hunters -of the Yukon.</b></span></p> - -<hr class="tiny" /> - -<p class="center">PRESS OPINIONS OF EDWARD STRATEMEYER’S BOOKS FOR YOUNG -PEOPLE.</p> - -<p>“In ‘Richard Dare’s Venture,’ Edward Stratemeyer has fully sustained his reputation -as an entertaining, helpful, and instructive writer for boys.”—<i>Philadelphia -Call.</i></p> - -<p>“‘Richard Dare’s Venture,’ by Edward Stratemeyer, tells the story of a country -lad who goes to New York to earn enough to support his widowed mother and -orphaned sisters. Richard’s energy, uprightness of character, and good sense carry -him through some trying experiences, and gain him friends.”—<i>The Churchman</i>, -New York.</p> - -<p>“A breezy boy’s book is ‘Oliver Bright’s Search.’ The author has a direct, graphic -style, and every healthy minded youth will enjoy the volume.”—<i>N. Y. Commercial -Advertiser.</i></p> - -<p>“‘Richard Dare’s Venture’ is a fresh, wholesome book to put into a boy’s hands.”—<i>St. -Louis Post Dispatch.</i></p> - -<p>“‘Richard Dare’s Venture’ is a wholesome story of a practical boy who made a -way for himself when thrown upon his own resources.”—<i>Christian Advocate.</i></p> - -<p>“It is such books as ‘Richard Dare’s Venture’ that are calculated to inspire -young readers with a determination to succeed in life, and to choose some honorable -walk in which to find that success. The author, Edward Stratemeyer, has shown a -judgment that is altogether too rare in the makers of books for boys, in that he has -avoided that sort of heroics in the picturing of the life of his hero which deals in -adventures of the daredevil sort. In that respect alone the book commends itself to -the favor of parents who have a regard for the education of their sons, but the story -is sufficiently enlivening and often thrilling to satisfy the healthful desires of the -young reader.”—<i>Kansas City Star.</i></p> - -<p>“Of standard writers of boys’ stories there is quite a list, but those who have not -read any by Edward Stratemeyer have missed a very goodly thing.”—<i>Boston Ideas.</i></p> - -<hr class="tiny" /> -<p class="center"><i>For sale by all booksellers, or will be sent, postpaid, on receipt of price by</i></p> -</div> - -<p class="ph1">LEE & SHEPARD, Publishers,<br /> -<small>BOSTON.</small></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<div class="transnote"> -<p class="ph1">TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:</p> - -<p>Obvious typographical errors have been corrected.</p> - -<p>Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized.</p> - -<p>Archaic or variant spelling has been retained.</p> - -<p>Incorrect page numbers in the Table of Contents and List of Illustrations have been corrected.</p> -</div></div> - -<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LOST ON THE ORINOCO ***</div> -<div style='text-align:left'> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will -be renamed. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. -</div> - -<div style='margin-top:1em; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE</div> -<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE</div> -<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person -or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: -</div> - -<blockquote> - <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most - other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions - whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms - of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online - at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this eBook. - </div> -</blockquote> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: -</div> - -<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - </div> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread -public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state -visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. -</div> - -</div> -</body> -</html> |